Home

ACS - Simulcast Solutions

1. Group 1 Group 2 Time Slot 24 Time Slot 24 CM 5RB T1 Circuit CM 5RB RS 485 CM 5RB T1 Circuit CM 5RB Master Slave Master Slave Group 3 Time Slot 24 CM 5RB T1 Circuit CM 5RB RS 485 Slave Master Figure 5 8 DSO Management Communications with Three Separate Control Groups To set up a network follow these basic procedures 1 Set all the stations in each control group to the same communications data rate and time slot 2 Setone station in each control group to master mode 3 Set all remaining stations within the control group to either bridge or slave mode 4 Connect the computer controlling each control group to the master station via an RS 232 on the remote port Warning Do not connect a computer to the remote port of subordinate stations A computer can be connected via RS 232 to the remote port of a bridge station but the computer only communicates with the bridge 5 If connecting one control group to another connect an RS 485 from the remote port of a slave in the first control group to the remote port of the master for the second control group 5 10 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011
2. 2 EI CM 5RB E Slave Oo wi LT in 3 eo o 1 E o CM 5RB c LI Slave s Time Slot Cross Connect 3 o 2 x A 3 o CM 5RB 9 Slave i m RS 232 o T Lad T CM 5RB Slave CrossConnect B 5 oO lal T1 Circuit tz E 2 o m Oo ba Ld CM 5RB Slave Time Slot T1 Circuit CM 5RB Cross a T1 Circuit Slave Connect e 3 o x CM 5RB o Ti Circuit Slave a 2 3 CM 5RB g Slave CrossConnect A o al 3 E P CM 5RB 9 o Slave o Time Slot E FE Cross Connect s 2 B tT CM 5RB o Slave x LI 3 2 CM 5RB Oo Slave CrossConnect C a Figure 5 9 DSO Management Communication in Multiple CrossConnect Configurations 5 1 2 3 CrossConnect Mapping for DSO Management Communications When using DSO management communication in a ring star or other complex network configuration you must give special attention to programming the CrossConnect systems The DSO time slot designated to transport the network management communications must pass through each common module in the control group The designated time slot for network communications is programmed in a pass through configuration on a CrossConnect system Figure 5 10 demonstrates an example of the pass through configuration for CrossConnect systems A and B Harris Corporation 5 11 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 e Receive port 1
3. OK CHANNEL CARD 12 TYPE 202 UNDER REMOTE CONTROL SRVC OFF P0O1 15 B00001111 P0O2 16 B00010000 P0O3 17 B00010001 P04 18 B00010010 P0O5 1 B00000001 P0O6 1 B00000001 P0O7 1 B00000001 P0O8 1 B00000001 P0O9 0 B00000000 P10 0 B00000000 Then type C13 SET SRVC ON Check that this change was successful by typing C13 CONFIG and observing that line 4 now reads SRVC ON Program Feed 2 is now being transmitted from Site B to Site A on this T1 circuit using time slots 15 through 18 Finally lock the remote port again with this command LOCK The system responds QE Example 2 Change Configuration For this example assume that you are operating a network with terminal multiplexers at sites B and C and a drop and insert multiplexer with an address of 7 at site A Multiplexer 7 contains a program audio transmitter whose card address is 4 Last night you used it to transmit a concert in 15 kHz high fidelity stereo on time slots 11 12 13 and 14 to site B Today you used it to transmit a sports event in 7 5 kHz monaural on time slot 9 to site C Figure 5 17 shows this setup 5 36 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Site B ACS 163 Terminal Multiplexer Program Receive 15 kHz Ti T1 stereo receiver y Network Network
4. ACS 165 A direction lt ADDRESS gt DI A CSU_STAT ACS 165 B direction lt ADDRESS gt DI B CSU_STAT Issue REMOTE_STAT Command You can query the remote CSU line performance of an ACS 160 Series multiplexer by issuing a REMOTE_STAT command to its TERM DI A or DI B module The remote end must be ANSI T1 403 1995 compatible Table 5 21 gives examples of REMOTE_STAT commands for ACS 160 Series multiplexers Table 5 21 REMOTE_STAT Command Model Command ACS 163 Terminal lt ADDRESS gt TERM REMOTE_STAT ACS 165 A direction lt ADDRESS gt DI A REMOTE_STAT ACS 165 B direction lt ADDRESS gt DI B REMOTE_STAT Harris Corporation 5 41 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Evaluate CSU STAT and REMOTE STAT Responses The CSU STAT and REMOTE STAT commands request the same data format from the local and remote ends of your network respectively This example is a typical response to the CSU STAT and REMOTE STAT commands OK ELAPS IMI Be 193527230 DETEC IM E 1 9252 730 CRC 1 1 lt CRC lt 5 5 lt CRC lt 10 10 lt CRC lt 100 100 CRC CRC 320 SEFE SEC FBE SEC BPV SEC S E P NH E IP iB SEC YEL SEC 5 0 Oo o0 319 0 CeOoooooco 5 Remote Co
5. Front Panel User Interfaces 30 sec after power up O O O Ol terrier ES a ena eap CM 5R Backup o Olo ol terrm ES a era eee CM 5R Primary Figure 3 6 Redundant CM 5RB FPUI 4 character Display with Power On Table 3 1 Redundant CM 5RB FPUI 4 character Display with Power On Primary CM 5RB Backup CM 5RB Mode Front Panel Display Front Panel Display Terminal TERM BTRM Drop and Insert A DI A BDIA Drop and Insert B DI B BDI B Spare SPAR SPAR 3 4 2 3 Idle Display Thirty seconds after startup the common module s front panel display changes to indicate their current status as either the active ACTV or standby STBY depending on which module is currently acting as the T1 line receiver Figure 3 23 Only one CM either primary or backup can exist in this state In most cases a failed module results in the display being blank FPUI use disables the idle display After 30 seconds of FPUI inactivity the idle display appears again 3 5 Module Adapters Each common module and channel module in an Access Server or STL multiplexer has a corresponding module adapter This section discusses the MA 215 and MA 217B module adapters for a CM 5RB common module and the MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 module adapter pair for CM 5RB common modules using line redundancy Individual channel module manuals contain information on their matching module adapters Harris Corporation 3 5 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Se
6. Harris Corporation A 3 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer A ISiCL CM 5RTD Delay Configuration Version 2 1 April 2011 A 4 Delay Setting with RS 232 Remote Port This method uses ISiCL SET commands with P codes to change the delay value The ISiCL commands are sent to the CM 5RTD module through the RS 232 remote port The settings of P04 P03 and the least significant bit of PO2 are used together to create a 17 bit binary number Figure A 1 this number plus five gives the actual instantaneous buffer depth P2 P3 P4 p 1 CEEEEEEEEEEREREEEEREEEEE Not used N IN These 17 bits taken as a single binary number represent the buffer depth setting less 5 Change mode 0 Step mode Most Significant Bit Least Significant Bit 1 Smooth mode MSB LSB Figure A 1 P Codes Used to Change Buffer Depth Delay Time The delay value of the hardware is updated whenever a parameter is changed Therefore when making multiple byte changes it is best to update the most significant bits first Also when the desired buffer depth is known only approximately it may be useful to make a large change in step mode to the approximate depth first and then make finer adjustments in smooth mode so as to minimize both the total time required to make the change and the overall amount of T1 circuit disruption For example look at a situation where the desired delay is first determin
7. are trademarks of Harris Corporation Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners How to Contact Us Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5300 Kings Island Drive Ste 101 Mason OH 45040 USA Sales 1 513 459 3400 Fax 1513 701 5316 E mail intraplex harris com Web www broadcast harris com How to Get Support If you have a technical question or issue with your Intraplex Products equipment please check our Customer Support Web page www broadcast harris com support productsupport asp You can also call the Customer Support line or send non emergency e mail e U S Canada and Latin America tsupport harris com e Europe Middle East and Africa 44 118 967 8100 or Service europe harris com e Asia and Pacific Rim 852 2776 0628 or BCDService harris com 1 217 222 8200 or Version Date Revisions Made Section Pages Editor 2 11 8 8 2011 Removed sentence in first paragraph of Power Supply Modules 2 1 5 2 18 LD section regarding DC power supply Added a note below paragraph to explain combined AC and DC power supply operation Added another note to section to explain function of power supply redundancy Reversed labels for Pin 1 and Pin 2 for RJ connector on Tables 3 4 3 5 2 3 8 3 5 and 3 11 now Table 3 9 Removed Tables 3 8 and 3 9 as 3 10 3 11 they were the same as Tables 3 4 and 3 5 Switched RJ connector 3 6 2 3 3 13 Pin 1 and Pin 2 on Figure 3 31 3 14 2 1 4 29 201
8. 3 Receive data R1 4e se 11 i DBASS DB 15P Figure 3 14 T1 Circuit Connection between MA 217B and CSU Warning The multiplexer and the CSU must both be set to use the same T1 frame format ESF or SF and line coding B8ZS or AMI 3 14 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 3 Installation amp Wiring ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 3 6 3 External Timing Connector Wiring Optional The MA 215 MA 235 1 MA 235 2 and MA 217B module adapters all provide RJ 11 ports for timing input and output Timing Out is a balanced 1 544 MHz RS 422 RS 485 output from the corresponding CM 5RB module that may be used as an external T1 timing source by other equipment Timing In is a balanced 1 544 MHz RS 422 RS 485 input to the corresponding CM 5RB module that may be connected to an external T1 timing source The CM 5RB module synchronizes to this source only if the module timing is set to EXT You can also use these jacks to form a daisy chain configuration with several multiplexers together and synchronize them all to the same clock Section 3 8 discusses this application of multiple systems synchronized to a common timing source Table 3 11 outlines the external timing input connection for these module adapters MA 215 MA 235 1 MA 235 2 MA 217B Table 3 11 MA 215 MA 235 1 MA 235 2 MA 217B Timing In Port Pin Assignments Connector
9. ERR yellow BPV yellow FRM red YEL yellow AIS yellow LOOP green INT green EXT green LPBK yellow CPU red POWER green NORMAL green ALERT yellow ALARM red Description Indication Transmit output is present Receive input is present Blinks when the receive input signal is all ones a yellow alarm or has excess jitter Might blink erratically if there is noise on the line Errors are detected Bipolar violations are detected T1 signal is out of frame or no signal is being received Receiving a yellow alarm Alarm indication signal all ones Loop timing is active through timing on a drop amp insert multiplexer Internal timing is active External timing is active Any internal loopback is active The CM 5RB module s central processing unit has failed The multiplexer is powered No alert or alarm is present An alert condition exists Section 6 6 5 1 An alarm condition exists Section 6 6 5 2 6 3 Diagnostic Functions The ACS 160 system provides several internal functions that assist in testing and troubleshooting which the next sections describe 6 3 1 T1 Loopback Use LPBK Group The LPBK group activates and deactivates these three T1 loopbacks which the CM 5RB module provides Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 6 3 ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting Version 2 11 August 2011 e Eq
10. MUNE SAME DIFF 2 3 xe o z LRDN NRVRT RVRT NOBK OFF wn oO E Jg 2 z m LSDLY 0S 0 5S 1S 10S E LRDLY 10S 1MIN 5MIN BER OFF 1E 3 1E 4 3 i 1E 5 1E 6 oO 4 2 oor ON OFF E LOS ON OFF AIS ON OFF UAS ON OFF YEL RA ON OFF Version 2 11 August 2011 ISiCL SET Parameter Description RVRT Revertive module switching Switches to backup module upon failure of primary module and then switches back to primary if the failure condition is cleared or if the backup module has failed NRVRT Non revertive module switching Switches to backup module upon failure of primary module and then switches back to the primary if the backup module has failed OFF Never switch modules due to module failure SAME The same type of T1 facility exists for both primary and backup lines When in SAME redundancy mode a failure of the primary common module CM results in a module switch only Service remains on the primary T1 line DIFF Dissimilar redundancy mode in which a different type of T1 facility exists for both primary and backup lines RVRT Revertive switching Switches to backup line upon failure of primary line and then switches back to primary line if primary line becomes better than the backup line or if both the primary and backup lines are good NRVRT Non revertive switching Switches to backup line upon failure of primary line and then switches back to the primary line if the
11. Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 Note Pressing up once on the SET NEXT switch causes the green top light to blink indicating a change is about to be made At this point you can abort the change by pressing down on the SET NEXT switch Pressing up on the SET NEXT switch a second time actually makes the change The green top light now stays on and the red light turns off indicating that the displayed number is the currently set address Table 5 1 Change Multiplexer Network Address From 0001 To 0040 Function On Off Step Action Display Light o 1 Press up or down on the GROUP switch one or more times to reach the ADDR group ADDR bui A 2 Press down on the SET NEXT switch once to display the current address The green 0001 on E72 top light turns on indicating the number on the display is the currently set OFF address iu ONES 3 Press down again on the SET NEXT switch to begin address editing 0001 orr is 4 Press down twice more on the SET NEXT switch to move the underscore to the third 0001 ON Bis digit OFF gm 5 Press up three times on the SET NEXT switch to change the third digit from 0 to 4 0041 as S ONES 6 Press down on the SET NEXT switch to move the underscore to the last digit 0041 orr fal ONES 7 Press up nine times on the SET NEXT switch to change the last digit from 1 to 0 0040 orr fal 8 Press down on the SET NEXT switch to restore the full size display The red bottom 0040 ON light tu
12. e Ifa problem occurs on a single channel always check to see if similar troubles exist on other channels If troubles exist on multiple channels at the same time the source of the channel troubles is probably a T1 circuit or CM 5RB failure rather than several simultaneous channel module failures e To isolate soft trouble such as a low bit error rate on a data channel or occasional clicks or pops on audio channels try in service T1 circuit monitoring Section 6 5 2 before performing out of service testing This monitoring can minimize overall circuit down time e To isolate hard trouble such as when troubleshooting a system that is unavailable because of a high error rate or loss of frame synchronization use a loopback procedure Section 6 3 1 or perform an out of service test Section 6 5 3 Once a system is in hard failure you do not incur additional downtime by using these techniques 6 6 3 Typical Troubleshooting Procedure Perform these steps to troubleshoot an ACS 160 Series system 1 Ateach location verify that the POWER indicator on the main power supply is on e If the POWER light is off there is a power related problem Check the power source and power connections e If you suspect an internal problem on a power supply use Section 6 6 4 Power Supply Test to check the voltages on the supply 2 Check that the CPU indicator light on the CM 5RB module is off If this light is on the CM 5RB CPU central processing u
13. ome CM 5R B prim ary common module channel CA 202 mo dule Backup T1 Line ooo channel module Figure 2 9 Signal Flow after Primary Module Failure An exception to this general rule can occur if the primary and backup T1 facilities require different interface settings for framing type transmit line build out or T1 line code as indicated by your selecting the MLINE setting or by using the Front Panel User Interface FPUI In these rare situations the interface settings on the primary CM only works with the primary T1 line and the settings on the backup CM only work with the backup T1 line To maintain proper interface operation in these cases a primary CM failure results in a switch of both the module and the line A module switch can be manually forced using either the front panel switches on the Front Panel User Interface or by issuing ISiCL commands If the user manually forces a module switch the system switches back according to the normal protocols for reversion For a permanent manual switch set module redundancy mode to OFF before the manual switch is initiated 2 1 4 5 Module Redundancy Revertive Operation You can configure module redundancy for revertive or non revertive switching This feature can be set separately for line and module redundancy If enabled module redundancy reversion occurs as soon as a working primary module replaces a failed primary module and the backup module s channel 2 12 Harris Corpora
14. 0 0 0 Oorl The eight least significant bits of the programmed T T T T T T T T delay setting A 3 CM 5RTD Operation The CM 5RTD module has a set of indicator lights located behind the TIMING indicator lights Table A 3 Table A 3 CM 5RTD Indicator Lights Indicator Description BUF Buffer This yellow light turns on when the delay buffer overflows or underflows indicating the input clock frequency is going outside the PLL lock range LOCK This green light turns on when the actual delay is identical to the configured delay SRVC This green light turns on when the delay functionality is activated The number of bits used in the buffer determines the delay setting The buffer depth can range from 6 bits to 131 076 bits Each T1 1 544 Mbps bit has a duration of 647 67 nanoseconds allowing you to set a delay time ranging from 3 89 microseconds to 84 00 milliseconds The delay is set by sending a 17 bit binary number to the CM 5RTD module the module takes this number adds five to it and uses the result to set the buffer depth in bits The 17 bit number can be sent to the CM 5RTD module in two ways through the RS 232 serial remote port using ISiCL P codes Section A 4 Delay Setting with RS 232 Remote Port or using the RS 422 control port Section A 5 Delay Setting with RS 422 Control Port Warning Valid numbers are binary 00000000000000001 through 11111111111111111 1 through 131 071 decimal Do not send all zeroes
15. 3 17 Connection for AC Operation of 3RU System with External Signal Battery 3 18 Connection for AC Operation of 1RU System with External Signal Battery 3 18 3RU Multiplexer Rear Panel with ACS OPT1 Dual AC Power Feed Option 3 18 3RU Side View or 1RU Top View with Module and Adapter Insertions 3 21 CM 5RB User Interface Horizontal View ssssssssse mme enn 4 1 CM 5RB Basic Configuration Group Menu Structure sssssssse eene 4 2 CM 5RB Advanced Configuration Group Menu Structure sss 4 8 Point to Point System Synchronized to Network ssessssssseeeemememm 4 14 Point to Point System Internally Timed from One End Not Synchronized to Network 4 14 Drop and Insert System Synchronized to Network sesssseeen mnn 4 14 Drop and Insert Internally Timed from One End Not Synchronized to Network 4 14 Point to Point Externally Timed from One End Not Synchronized to Network 4 15 Multiple Systems Synchronized to Common Timing Source sss 4 16 Multiple Frame Synchronized Systems sssssssssssssssseen mene 4 17 Direct Connection to Multiplexer 0 nn emen 5 1 Daisy Chain Connection to Other Control Modules sssseeen menn 5 2 SCM IP Connection on Remote Network Management Systems sssssesesesese 5 2 Common Module Configuration Settings
16. 64 kbps time slots time slots in each in each direction o PR direction Channel modules for voice data audio 2 transmit audio receive Payload circuits and other types Figure 2 24 Drop and Insert Multiplexer Configuration The ACS 165 multiplexer is a 3RU 5 high shelf that accommodates up to sixteen channel modules while the ACS 168 multiplexer is a LRU 134 high shelf that accommodates up to four channel modules The 3RU shelf can accommodate one or two plug in power supplies AC or DC The 1RU shelf contains a single fixed AC power supply The functionality of these two multiplexers is otherwise identical Section 2 1 2 Drop and Insert Operation the Signal Bus Role gives more details on the internal workings of a drop and insert multiplexer 2 2 5 Drop and Insert Systems The addition of one or more drop and insert multiplexers converts a simple point to point system into a drop and insert system Figure 2 25 Data voice program audio and distribution multiple drop circuits can be established between any two locations in a T1 drop and insert system 2 28 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 2 Functional Description ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Location 1 Location 2 Location 3 ACS 163 ACS 165 ACS 163 Terminal multiplexer Drop Insert Multiplexer Terminal multiplexer Ti T1 circuit circuit Voice 1 Dats 3 Voice
17. ACS 163 Terminal ACS 165 Drop Insert ACS 163 Terminal Multiplexer Multiplexer Multiplexer Through Circuits gt gt CM 5RB CM 5RB lt K Vv i V v i in in Perd Data Voice Voice Data Cent E gyan Data Voice Audio Ot Module Module Module Module 9 x Module Module DEA TE Ony DI B TERM TXA TXA TXB TX B TX A TX A Audio Voice TX Module Module Module RX Only TERM TX A TX A Txt RXS RX B RX B TS1 4 TS5 6 TS7 TS7 TS5 6 TS 5 6 TS 7 24 TS 7 24 TS 5 6 MA MA RB RX B RX A RX A RX B RX B Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit 1 2 3 3 2 4 5 5 5 4 1 Network Network Circuit 1 Simplex audio from Site 1 to Site 3 on time slots 1 to 4 TERM or TX A BUS switch is on at both sites Circuit 2 Duplex voice between Site 1 and Site 2 on time slots 5 and 6 TERM or TX A BUS switch is on at both sites Circuit 3 Simplex data from Site 2 to Site 1 on time slot 7 TERM or TX A BUS switch is on at both sites Circuit 4 Duplex voice between Site 2 and Site 3 on time slots 5 and 6 TERM or TX A BUS switch isoff at Site 2 and on at Site 3 Circuit 5 Duplex wideband data between Site 2 and Site 3 on time slots 7 to 24 TERM or TX A BUS switch off at Site 2 and on at Site 3 Strike through indicates the inapplicable or unused side of a simplex Figure 2 13 Channel Module Direction and Time Slot Setti
18. Lom RROR M RROR M F STATUS DUNDANCY YI UNDANCY Y EIB ESSAGE ESSAGE ES NO ES NO A 235 gt 1 gt n gt lt CR gt lt LF gt Table 5 11 shows the channel module STATUS message commands for line and module redundancy Table 5 11 I SiCL STATUS Message Line Module Redundancy Mode Primary Backup Primary Backup Primary Backup ISiCL Status Message MODULE REDUNDANCY LINE REDUNDANCY MA ISiCL Status Message Response and Meaning YES if your hardware is module redundancy capable This is always YES if using the CM 5RB module and MA 235 module adapter YES if your hardware is line redundancy capable This is always YES if using the CM 5RB module and MA 235 module adapter STD if the common module has auto detected the MA 210 211 216 217 218 module adapter types MA 235 module adapter if common module has auto detected the MA 235 1 or MA 235 2 adapter ISiCL STATUS error messages support combined module and line redundancy Table 5 12 Table 5 12 Line Module Redundancy I SiCL STATUS Error Messages Line Module Redundancy Mode Backup Primary Backup Primary Backup Primary Backup Backup Primary Primary Backup Primary Backup Shelf Status ALERT ALERT ALERT ALERT ALERT ALERT NORMAL ALARM ISiCL STATUS Error Message Description SWITCHED TO BACKUP COMMON MODULE The backup module
19. STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 4 Setup amp Configuration Version 2 11 August 2011 Station clock Location 1 or other 1 544 MHz Location 2 timing source External Timing Loop Timed Externally External Timing Output Location 3 External Timing Loop p Input Timed Externally Timed PTT Network N External Timing Output Location 4 External Timing L Input oop ia Timed Externally Timed PTT Network Figure 4 9 Multiple Systems Synchronized to Common Timing Source 4 4 6 Frame Synchronized T1 Systems Synchronized T1 systems have equal bit rates frequencies and are phase locked except for a limited amount of jitter and wander But synchronized T1 systems are not frame synchronized in general that is systems in a synchronized network may transmit a given time slot at different times Frame synchronization is generally required whenever it is necessary to have precise control over the relative delay times between multiple T1 circuits For example frame synchronization can be useful in a mobile radio broadcast system using simulcasting with multiple transmitter sites To maximize coverage each transmitter in a simulcast system must transmit the same signal at a specific time relative to the other transmitters Frame synchronization allows fixed time delays to be added to individual circuits in order to achieve the exact desired transmission delay for each circuit Multi
20. Spaces Spaces are ignored so you can use them to make command lines more readable For example these three ISiCL commands are perceived as identical by the multiplexer 3 TERM SET PTIME EXT 3 TERM SET PTIME EXT 3 TERM SET PTIME EXT Line feed lt LF gt characters are also ignored You can configure a terminal or PC to generate either a single carriage return CR character or a CR LF pair when you press the Enter key The input buffer for ISiCL commands has a maximum capacity of 99 characters including spaces and line feeds If 100 or more characters are entered before the carriage return is sent those beyond the 99th are ignored The comment field may contain any printable ASCII characters ISiCL commands are not case sensitive You can enter sub addresses commands and parameters in upper or lower case or in a combination of both General Format of ISiCL Responses Upon receiving a valid command the addressed CM 5RB module always gives this initial response OK This line indicates only that a valid command was received and not necessarily that the multiplexer or the module itself is OK If the received command is SET UNLOCK or LOCK which do not require explicit responses no additional response lines are generated However if the received command is CONFIG or STATUS the OK line is followed by one or more lines containing the requested
21. When no lights are blinking the BLNK group is empty Table 6 3 BLNK Group Message Description Ftim Fallback timing One of the timing lights is blinking indicating that the CM 5RB transmitter is in its fallback internal timing mode A timing light blinks when the CM 5RB module is configured to operate in the looped through or external timing modes but cannot do so generally because of a T1 facility CM 5RB module or external timing source failure The INT indicator light stays on continuously while the module is in the fallback internal timing mode NLLB Network is requesting a line loopback NPLB Network is requesting a payload loopback RxYI Receive Yellow Alarm The CM 5RB receiver detects a Remote Alarm Indication RAI indicating that the far end shelf has lost the incoming signal and is experiencing a loss of frame condition Rx11 Receive all ones The CM 5RB receiver detects a framed or unframed all ones signal which might indicate that the far end shelf is idle or set to equipment loopback An AIS usually suggests that there is a transmission interruption at the device generating the AIS or further up the network An unframed all ones is a T1 alarm indication signal AIS Rx11 also appears when the T1 carries payload that consists of nearly all ones specifically when there are fewer than three zeroes in two consecutive T1 frames Tx11 Transmit AIS Alarm indication signal transmit unframed all ones signal Also in
22. ak 23 T LINC 1 Zzm mzz gt TILINE 2 Termna or 207 Z055 3 iDropinsert B Drop lnsert 4 aoo Coo n2 Wo z5m mS CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Y gt E IV p Qn ESEEmE 2 v ea zo 25maim s Ge FEE m EFE pE boppoo Cle el L a oto SSS OG BA BARA z zz z 45449 a amp MODULE MODLLE BEGG ovez ADAPTER ADAPTER earn AO MA 215 x Slot 1 Stet 2 Power Distribution Bus Signal Bus ue T e a MIDPLANE Y Y Y ANS AS A vy n HN am CM 5RE B CM SRE W CHANNEL CHANNEL m COMMON COMMON MODULE MODULE e o 2 E MODULE MODLLE SLOT 3 SLOT 15 vz2 z5 SLOT1 amp OT2 emo PMZ TERM DO B AL lt J DI A i ACS t6 z ONLY 1 NOTE All connections to module adapters and channel modules are on Pins 15 32 Figure 2 1 Midplane Connections Note The ACS 166 and ACS 169 Dual Terminal Access Servers use different midplanes from those used in the ACS 163 Terminal Access Server ACS 165 Drop and Insert Access Server ACS 168 Drop and Insert Access Server STL 163 Studio to Transmitter Link and STL 165 Studio to Transmitter Link multiplexers It is not possible to use these five multiplexers as dual terminal access servers Power enters at either the AC or battery connectors and passes to the power supply The power supply provides three voltages to the power distribution bus 5 VDC 15 VDC and 15 VDC from
23. and entered alarms for channel modules on sub address 1 and 2 are totaled onto the shelf alarm using a logical OR function ALL is the factory default 5 2 3 9 Line Module Redundancy I SiCL CONFIG Message The ISiCL CONFIG message has been changed to support the added ISiCL SET parameters All new SET parameters are added to the CONFIG message response as in this example BTERM CONFIG CR o N P IN PRIMARY TIMING E IN FALLBACK TIMING CH ALM ALL FRAMING ESF CODE B8ZS MRDN RVRT M L L L AE INE SAME RDN RVRT UAS ON YEL RA ON BER 10E 3 Harris Corporation 5 39 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 5 2 3 10 CSU Line Performance Statistics The integrated CSU detects organizes and stores CSU line performance statistics in industry standardized formats You can use this data to identify existing line problems as well as monitor for developing problems Note CSU statistics are only available when the CM 5RB module is operating in ESF mode Section 4 2 2 Display and Change Items in Basic Configuration Group and Table 4 8 give information on verifying the CM 5RB module s frame format CSU Line Performance Statistics Standard Selection CSU line performance statistics
24. carefully controlled changeover to fallback timing its own internal oscillator 4 4 2 Timing Status I ndicator Lights Three lights on the CM 5RB module Loop Int and Ext indicate the current T1 transmitter timing configuration Table 3 5 If the CM 5RB module is using fallback timing the indicator light for the primary timing mode blinks and the indicator light for the fallback timing mode factory set to internal is on continuously Table 4 5 Timing Status I ndicator Lights Label Description INT Internal timing ON CM 5RB transmitter is using its internal 1 544 MHz clock EXT External timing ON CM 5RB transmitter is using timing provided by external clock BLI NKI NG External timing is selected for primary timing but module is currently using fallback timing Loop Loop or through timing On a terminal multiplexer the indicator lights represent ON CM 5RB transmitter is loop timed BLI NKI NG Loop timing is selected for primary timing however the module is currently using fallback timing On a drop amp insert multiplexer the indicator lights represent ON CM 5RB transmitter is through timed BLI NKI NG Through timing is selected for primary timing but module is currently using fallback timing 4 12 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 4 Setup amp Configuration ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 4 4 3 Timing Status Functions Several func
25. ccceeee cece eect eee teeta enes 1 8 1 5 2 Indicator Lights cariene iiaiai iian rex re Ep tH OX ERR RE XEREX coin ead ened ceeds 1 9 Section 2 Functional Design eeeeseeeeeen nnne 271 2 1 CompohentTuhctlofiallbys i wetsis ss eios age Puce eve dest a Te Ay dd Sak ees 2 1 2 1 1 Main Equipment Shelf and Midplane ssesssssssm me 2 1 2 1 2 Drop and Insert Operation the Signal Bus Role ssseseeeeeeeesse 2 2 2 1 3 CM 5RB Common Modules cece eee mme mese esee rennes 2 3 2 1 4 Redundancy weree dx EE ERE SEE PI ERU od bas EE RR aac ee 2 9 2 1 5 Power Supply Modules ssssssssssssesm mmm eme meminere 2 18 2 1 6 Channel Modules erede testet heben eta i usta aan AE idis 2 20 2 1 7 Module Adapters ic ie iE EE ED REX e Ee Rer de arf 2 22 2 2 System Functlonallbly 1 ecrire ra nice a SR RING ga ee ee Us 2 23 2 2 1 T1 Digital Transmission eer err ael ena Rer eR REV 2 23 2 2 2 Terminal Multiplexers 0 eee mme mme emen tnnee n nnns 2 26 2 2 3 Point to Point Systemsa iuie danei e e meses heme aaa 2 27 2 2 4 Drop and Insert Multiplexers ACS 165 and ACS 168 ssessesesss 2 28 2 2 5 Drop and Insert Systems cece eee eee eee enne 2 28 Section 3 Installation amp Wiring eene 3 1 3 1 Tools amp Cables Required c ccce cece cece cece ee ee eee eee eens eee e eee eee ee ees 3 1 3 2 T1 Multiplexer
26. cssssssssss mme ene enne 4 22 Table 5 1 Change Multiplexer Network Address From 0001 To 0040 ccce 5 4 EIU 527 STO Gro p piin 5 5 Table 5 3 DSO Management Communication Settings Abridged Basic Config Menu 5 7 Table 5 4 Sub address Field EntrieS cc cee ccc eect eee eee eee ese ne semen memes 5 20 Table 5 5 Command Field Entries onae a e ehh e memes memes 5 21 Table 5 6 ISICE Commands 3 41 2 even ese de rtu ty Caves he eur eR IDR a tied eee RII RR ew ded 5 22 Table 5 7 Alert and Alarm Messages Responding To STATUS Command sssseesesss 5 26 Table 5 8 Parameter Names and Values for CM 5RB SET Commands esses 5 28 Table 5 9 I SICL SET Parameters 2i inr eR dr RERUM REIP RUDRX de 4 RR E Ea YN NARI 5 29 Table 5 10 Typical STATUS Response and Meaning sssssssssssss eeee teen eeeaaeees 5 31 Table 5 11 ISICL STATUS Message ssssssssssssssn esI mI sme sene hee hene tete rn 5 32 Table 5 12 Line Module Redundancy ISiCL STATUS Error Messages errre 5 32 Table 5 13 Typical CONFIG Response and Meaning cccceee ee eee cence eee mne 5 34 Table 5 14 Commands for Setting PT 150C Coding ccccceeee ee ee eee eee ee eee enne 5 34 Table 5 15 Explanation of CONFIG Response for Example 1 2ccceeeee eee eeeee eee eee eeeaeeees 5 35 Table 5 16 Explana
27. previously stated this failure does not actually occur until operating power is removed and restored To restore the multiplexer to service perform these steps 1 Replace the failed module with a spare common module 2 Return the failed unit to the factory for microprocessor replacement Warning Intraplex common modules may contain replaceable batteries There is a danger of explosion if a replaceable battery is incorrectly replaced Only replace this battery with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions 2 1 3 7 CM 5RB User Interface To enable user settings and display status information the front edge of the CM 5RB module Figure 2 6 has e Two switches e A four character alphanumeric display e Several indicator lights T1 input Function SET NEXT Transmit test jacks 4 character switch timing display T1 output Grou ON OFF T1 status Loopback test jacks switc switc Yellow BPV Pel GROUP FUNCTION ON SET OFF NEXT MON EQUIP MON TX OUT RX IN T1 OUT T1 IN Figure 2 6 CM 5RB Common Module Front View Use GROUP and SET NEXT Switches and Alphanumeric Display The user accessible CM 5RB module functions are organized into groups which include e Setup options such as SF and ESF frame formats e Current status conditions such as receiving all ones e Informational items such as the CM 5RB
28. sssssssssssseeenn menn 5 8 DSO Communication in Simple Point to Point Configuration ssseseenn 5 9 DSO Communication in Drop and Insert Configuration sssssseeH 5 9 DSO Communication on CrossConnect Star Configuration sssssssssseesenn 5 9 DSO Management Communications with Three Separate Control Groups 5 10 DSO Management Communication in Multiple CrossConnect Configurations 5 11 Pass through Config ratlOn erret ER ERR RRER REA ER EE ER ERREUR Eae Ara 5 12 CM 5RB Configuration Screen erap aea enemies eee eene ns 5 16 CME5RB Status Screen ese E E HER taxe ea wene date ce ea ESPERA ABEL PELA TRE VET EUN 5 16 DS 64NC General Screen e Deb Ee aed tn es 5 17 DS 64NG Testing Screen ceteri tt tete p ht Red ia dE eda d Eo EE RR E ERREUR 5 17 DS 64NC Status SGEeGD us reu tere piri aere bete deat bones a a abe aas 5 18 Turning Modules On and Off with Remote Control sssssssesseeee 5 35 Change Channel Module Configuration by Remote Control s sss 5 37 Relationship of CSU Line Performance Data Commands to Multiplexers 5 42 V Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Table of Contents Version 2 11 August 2011 Figure 6 1 CM 5RB Module Front View csssssssssse eh emen enhn enne ne rae aa ea nnn 6 2 Figure 6 2 GROUP and SET NEXT Switches in 3RU She
29. 0 5 seconds Line redundancy failure integration time of 1 second Line redundancy failure integration time of 10 seconds Exit the SDLY sub menu Line redundancy reversion switch delay of 10 seconds Line redundancy reversion switch delay of 1 minute Line redundancy reversion switch delay of 5 minutes Exit the RDLY sub menu Line failure criteria Loss of signal LOS Line failure is declared if receiving LOS Loss of signal is the absence of pulses lasting for one millisecond or more Line failure criteria Out of frame OOF Line failure is declared if receiving OOF Line failure criteria Alarm Indication Signal AIS Line failure is declared if receiving AIS Line failure criteria based on an Unavailable Seconds UAS count Line failure is declared if line is in Unavailable Signal State ten consecutive Severely Errored Seconds UAS is available in T1 ESF Extended Superframe only Line failure criteria Yellow alarm T1 Line failure is declared if receiving Yellow alarm T1 Exit the FAIL sub menu Line failure criteria Excessive Bit Error Rate Line failure is declared if BER exceeds user defined threshold 1 x 10 3 Bit Error Rate BER threshold 1 x 10 4 Bit Error Rate BER threshold 1 x 10 5 Bit Error Rate BER threshold 1 x 10 6 Bit Error Rate BER threshold Exit the BER sub menu 4 23 This page is left blank intentionally 4 24 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products Section 5 Remote
30. 1 Data 1 Voice 2 Voice 3 Data 1 Program Program Program Transmit Receive Receive Voice 2 Voice 2 Data 2 Data 2 Figure 2 25 ACS 165 Drop and Insert System A three location system can provide circuits between these locations e land2 e 2and3 e land3 The only limiting factor is the 24 time slot capacity of the T1 circuit between any two adjacent locations Drop and insert systems are not limited to a single drop and insert multiplexer In fact you can use them to link as many as one hundred locations Harris Corporation 2 29 Intraplex Products This page is left blank intentionally 2 30 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products Section 3 Installation amp Wiring This section describes installation procedures and guidelines for ACS 160 Series installation including 1 Unpack and inspect the ACS 160 Series equipment 2 Install the multiplexer shelves 3 Wire the power and signal connectors 4 Apply power 3 1 Tools amp Cables Required In addition to the Intraplex equipment provided these items are necessary to complete installation e Basic telecommunications installation tool kit screwdrivers wire stripper and so forth e Rack mounting hardware four threaded bolts per shelf e One four wire shielded cable with RJ 48C connectors one male end one female end for each T1 port e T1 connecting cables Normally T1 connecting cables may run up to 150 feet in length If your installation requires a longer
31. 1 7 ACS 169 Multiplexer Rear View ccc eee 1 7 CM 5RB Module Front View sssssssssss ene eene 1 8 CM 5RB GROUP and SET NEXT Switches on 3RU Shelf nicnn 1 8 Midplane Connections s sssssrsssrssrsrrartrstretrtttr ee se sese sene ene eee emen 2 1 Terminal Multiplexer Signal Bus sssssssssee nm eem meme emen 2 2 Drop and Insert Multiplexer Signal Bus sssssseee memes 2 2 CM 5RB Common Module T1 Functional Diagram sssseeenm e 2 3 Mean Time to Lose T1 Frame Synchronization ssssssssesememememem 2 5 CM 5RB Common Module Front View sssssssssseeemmmemememememe senes 2 6 Redundant CM 5RB Functions in Drop and Insert Multiplexer seeeesesese 2 10 Combined Module and Line Redundancy Block Diagram sse 2 12 Signal Flow after Primary Module Failure sssssseemmmmememene 2 12 Signal Flow after Primary Line Failure cece eee eee eee ee eens 2 14 Y Series Power Supply Indicator Lights ccceceeee cece eee eee eee menm 2 18 Power Supply Module Functional Diagram cc ceceeeee cece cece e tees emen 2 20 Channel Module Direction and Time Slot SettingS cecececee eect eect eee eee eee ees 2 21 Module and Module Adapter Insertion in 3RU Side or 1RU Top View 2 22 Train Representation of T1 Circuit Duplex Nature sssssseee meme 2 23 Superframe SE FOrtfiat usce
32. 1RU Shelf n og Signaling Ec E 2 Connector Do m 7 4 On the rear panel of the multiplexer For AC 3 prong jack For DC Terminal strip 3RU shelves 2 6 watts 3 6 watts w module adapter for each CM 5RB common module one in a terminal multiplexer two in a dual terminal or drop insert multiplexer plus channel module consumption Nominal Input Voltages 115 VAC or 230 VAC Input Voltage Range 90 to 264 VAC Input Fuse 2A slow blow Output Power 60 Watts Nominal Input Voltage 24 VDC Input Voltage Range 20 to 36 VDC Input Fuse 5A slow blow Output Power 50 Watts Nominal Input Voltage 48 VDC Input Voltage Range 40 to 72 VDC Input Fuse 5A slow blow Output Power 50 Watts Nominal Input Voltages 115 VAC or 230 VAC Input Voltage Range 90 to 264 VAC Input Fuse 2A slow blow Output Power 95 Watts Nominal Input Voltages 115 VAC or 230 VAC Input Voltage Range 90 to 264 VAC Input Fuse 2A slow blow Output Power 30 Watts Voltage 60 VDC maximum Fuse 2A Slow blow external required On rear panel terminal strip 3RU or DB 15S alarm connector 1RU Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 7 Specifications Temperature Humidity Height Width Depth Front Projection Weight Physical and Environmental Regulatory Compliance ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Ox 50xC operating 109
33. 1RU shelf contains a single fixed AC power supply The next sections discuss single and dual terminal multiplexers 2 2 2 1 Single Terminals ACS 163 ACS 167 The ACS 163 and ACS 167 terminal multiplexers serve as an interface between a single T1 circuit and multiple voice program data and other types of payload circuits Figure 2 21 ACS 163 Terminal Multiplexer 1 544 Mbps Channel modules T1 Circuit for voice data p CM audio transmit 5RB audio receive and other Twenty four 64 kbps time slots in each direction Payload circuits Figure 2 21 Single Terminal Multiplexer Configuration The ACS 163 multiplexer is a 3RU 5 high shelf that accommodates up to sixteen channel modules while the ACS 167 multiplexer is a LRU 134 high shelf that accommodates up to five channel modules The 3RU shelf can accommodate one or two plug in power supplies AC or DC The 1RU version contains a single fixed AC power supply The functionality of these two multiplexers is otherwise identical 2 2 2 2 Dual Terminal Multiplexer ACS 166 ACS 169 The ACS 166 dual terminal multiplexer is a 3RU 5 high shelf that provides two separate T1 terminals in one chassis Figure 2 22 Each T1 circuit is supported by one CM 5RB module and has eight slots available for channel modules The ACS 169 is a 1RU 1 high shelf that accommodates up to four channel modules The functionality of these two multiplexers is otherwise ide
34. 2 1 2 T1 Line Coding To assist in detecting transmission errors all T1 lines use one of these two forms of line coding e AMI alternate mark inversion e B8ZS Bipolar With 8 Zero Substitution 2 24 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 2 Functional Description ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 AMI is a simple bipolar coding scheme Each 1 bit in the data stream is given an opposite polarity from the one before it while each O bit is neutral Figure 2 18 If two 1s in a row have the same polarity it is a bipolar violation and indicates a transmission error the BPV indicator on the CM 5RB module flashes flickers erratically whenever a bipolar violation is detected AMI is an older system with a significant limitation when the payload being transmitted contains too many Os in a row a condition called insufficient ones density the T1 circuit may lose frame synchronization Bipolar violation 3 DSX level 0 3 Value 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 Figure 2 18 AMI Line Coding To help prevent insufficient ones density on AMI networks many Intraplex channel modules offer methods of preventing long strings of Os from occurring These methods include e Placing the payload data into alternate time slots any unused time slots are automatically filled with all ones e Using only 56 kbps instead of 64 kbps per time slot and filling every eighth bit
35. 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Harris Corporation ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 1 August 2011 ACS 163 Multiplexer Rear View with MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 Module Adapters 3 4 Basic Drop and Insert Configuration cece cece emm memes 3 4 CM 5RB FPUI 4 character Display Location ssssssssseee emen 3 4 Redundant CM 5RB FPUI 4 character Display with Power On ssssseseennn 3 5 MA 215 and MA 217B Module Adapter Top and Front Views ssssssseeeen 3 6 MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 Face Plates and Connector Locations sssessssssss 3 9 Rear Panel Connectors on ACS 165 Using MA 215 Module Adapters 3 11 Rear Panel Connectors on ACS 168 Using MA 217B Module Adapters 3 11 Connectors and Pin Locations on MA 215 and MA 217B sssssenme 3 12 MA 215 MA 235 1 or MA 235 2 T1 Port and RJ 48C Connector Pin Orientation 3 12 T1 Circuit Connection between MA 215 MA 235 1 or MA 235 2 and CSU 3 14 T1 Circuit Connection between MA 217B and CSU ssssssssesesseeeememems 3 14 Connection for DC Operation of 3RU Systems sssssssssseeee memes 3 17 Connection for DC Operation of 3RU Systems with Two Power Sources
36. CPU indicator light on e Loss of receive signal e Signal present but out of frame RX IN and FRM indicator lights on 6 20 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 e No transmit output TX OUT indicator light off e Alarm at one or more channel modules module s alarm indicator light is on or module is in alarm state The ALARM indicator light is also on briefly when power is first applied to the system 6 6 5 3 Alarm Cut Off ACO Switch The alarm cut off ACO switch is located near the front of each power supply module Figure 6 11 When the ACO switch is off the alarm and alert relays respond to alarm and alert conditions However when the ACO switch is on these relays are disabled that is they are forced into their normal non alarm positions You can use the ACO switch on an ACS 160 Series multiplexer to silence a local alarm once this multiplexer has been identified as the source of the alarm After correcting the condition that produced the alarm or alert be sure to return the ACO switch to its off position The 1RU shelf has no power supply redundancy capability When an Intraplex 3RU multiplexer is equipped with a redundant power supply the relays on both the main and redundant power supplies respond to alarm and alert conditions ensuring that alarm alert monitoring continues even while one
37. Code B8ZS Timing Internal terminal multiplexers or Through drop and insert multiplexers Line Loopback OFF Payload Loopback OFF Equipment Loopback OFF A factory reset does not affect any settings on the multiplexer other than these listed settings To view the contents of the DIAG group perform these steps 1 Press up or down on the GROUP switch until the display reads DIAG 2 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch to cycle through the functions in the DIAG group 3 To leave the DIAG group press up or down on the GROUP switch 6 3 5 Alerts and Alarms 6 3 5 1 Alert Conditions In the factory default setting for most applications except STL PLUS Section 6 3 5 3 the ACS 160 signals an ALERT condition when one or more of these events occurs e Receiving yellow alarm RX IN indicator light is blinking and RxYl appears in the BLNK group e Receiving alarm indication signal RX IN indicator light is blinking and RxII appears in the BLNK group Channel module time slot conflict Any internal loopback active LPBK indicator light is on Network requested loopback LPBK indicator light is blinking Loss of primary timing fallback timing is activated and the timing indicator light corresponding to the currently selected primary timing mode is blinking e Single power supply failure POWER FAIL indicator light is on if using the redundant power supply option e Alarm cut off ACO switch on e Alert at one or
38. Control Operation This section discusses multiplexer physical connections for remote control and various ways you can remotely configure and operate an ACS 160 Series or STL 160 Series multiplexer You can physically connect your multiplexer in one of three ways e A serial cable connection to the shelf via the remote port Section 5 1 1 e DSO management communication Section 5 1 2 e An SCM IP module and an MA 440 module adapter connecting to an IP network Section 5 1 3 Likewise you can use one of these interfaces to configure and operate the multiplexer e IntraGuide Configuration and Management Software all three connections Section 5 2 1 e SNMP via the SCM IP module third connection Section 5 2 2 e Intraplex Simple Command Language ISiCL first two connections Section 5 2 3 5 1 Physical Connections 5 1 1 Remote Port The ACS 160 Series and STL 160 Series multiplexers can be set up and monitored via the RS 232 remote port which can be connected in any of these ways e To a local PC Figure 5 1 e Ina daisy chain manner with other Intraplex control modules Figure 5 2 e To an SCM IP module Figure 5 3 A terminal multiplexer has one remote port while a dual terminal or drop and insert multiplexer has two remote ports Remote ports are RS 232C compatible asynchronous serial interfaces which can operate at baud rates from 110 bps to 57 6 kbps Each CM 5RB common module has one remote port connector The remote port
39. Enter key at the end of every command line Address Field The first field in an ISIiCL command line is the address field which contains the multiplexer s network address Valid ISiCL network addresses are the integers from 1 to 9999 Leading zeros are not required you can enter an address of 0005 simply as 5 0 is not a valid ISiCL address and you should not use it Section 5 1 1 2 Configuration Network Address ADDR Group Setting gives the procedure for setting the multiplexer s network address The network address is used to route a command to a specific multiplexer when commands are broadcast to several multiplexers at once If the address field in an ISiCL command contains a number only the multiplexer set to that address responds If the address field is left blank any multiplexer responds to an otherwise valid command In a system involving a single remote control link the address field is generally left blank For example if you are entering ISiCL commands from a modem equipped PC that is connected over a dial up voice circuit to a single modem equipped terminal multiplexer the SET command discussed previously could be entered as follows TERM SET PTIME EXT The colon terminating the address field is required even when the address field itself is left blank Harris Corporation 5 19 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote C
40. Failure Backup Manual Switch Refresh Now 2 TERM STATUS OK gt gt gt ALARM AT SHELF lt lt lt MODULE REDUNDANCY YES LINE REDUNDANCY YES MA H 235 ALERT AT C06 RECEIVE SIGNAL LOSS RECEIVER OUT OF FRAME PRIMARY LINE FAILURE Figure 5 12 CM 5RB Status Screen IntraGuide software provides support for numerous Intraplex channel modules Figure 5 13 shows the configuration controls for a DS 64NC synchronous data module 5 16 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Starting buffer depth 6000 bits Generate all ones T M kbps Equipment loopback Ee Figure 5 13 DS 64NC General Screen Figure 5 14 shows configuration controls for testing the DS 64NC module Figure 5 14 DS 64NC Testing Screen This interface can also show channel module status Figure 5 15 Harris Corporation 5 17 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 File Edit Setup View Help Dice CM 5_1 O BERS emia Alias Name Comm Port Address Card Address DS B4NC C1 COM1 1 ci Card Type DS 64NC Description Wideband Synchronous Data Module i Service Config Error Transmit Activity Receive Activity Remote Loopback 2 e
41. Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Location 1 Location 2 Data Test Set IN OUT ACS 160 Series Multiplexer ACS 160 Series Multiplexer Data Module Ti Circuit Other voice data and program circuits 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting Internal loopback or External loopback plug Other voice data and program Circuits Figure 6 8 Data Channel Testing on In Service T1 System Figure 6 9 shows an end to end test on a voice or program audio channel For duplex voice channels perform the test in each direction of the circuit Location 1 Location 2 Tone Generator OUT ACS 160 Series Multiplexer Audio Rx Module ACS 160 Series Multiplexer Audio Tx Module T1 Circuit Other voice data and program circuits Audio Test Set IN Other voice data and program Circuits Figure 6 9 Voice or Audio Channel Testing on I n Service T1 System Figure 6 10 shows that you can perform local loopback tests on individual channel modules before putting a multiplexer into service by activating its equipment loopback or by establishing a local loopback using a T1 patch cord You can only perform loopback tests on full duplex 4 wire voice and data channels 6 16 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation am
42. IntraGuide Software IntraGuide is a software program that gives you a simple method to review the status of the multiplexer and change operational parameters IntraGuide software allows you to e Check system status visually e Interrogate for alarm conditions e Monitor and log hardware and communications links e Remotely configure your multiplexer system The program has an intuitive look and feel that meets the needs of both experienced technicians and casual users IntraGuide software also works offline Configurations can be created in advance saved and imported later 5 2 1 1 Hardware Requirements The IntraGuide software is designed to operate as an application under these operating systems e Windows NT e Windows 2000 e Windows XP e Windows Vista You also need an available serial port To use the IntraGuide network connectivity features your PC must be equipped with an Ethernet 10 100 BaseT network interface A Super VGA SVGA display or better is required If your graphic display is set to 256 colors or less you may experience occasional color distortions and image flashing 5 2 1 2 IntraGuide Access To load IntraGuide software on your PC run SETUP EXE directly from the Intraplex User Manual Library CD which launches the setup program and prompts you through the remainder of the installation process You can also perform these steps to download this interface from the Harris BCD Web site 1 Go to http www b
43. Jitter buffer depth This function adjusts the multiplexer s jitter tolerance Selecting a higher value increases the jitter buffer depth but also increases circuit delay RED not selected GREEN selected No jitter buffer minimum delay May not work in DI A or DI B mode or if payload loopback PaLB is on Sets jitter buffer depth to 32 bits Sets jitter buffer depth to 128 bits Resets the jitter buffer Exit J BUF and display FRAM Frame loss sensitivity This function sets the criteria for declaring a loss of frame synchronization condition When a loss of frame synchronization is declared the FRM indicator light turns on and the multiplexer immediately begins to reestablish frame synchronization RED not selected GREEN selected Frame loss is declared when three out of five consecutive framing patterns are in error Frame loss is declared when two out of four consecutive framing patterns are in error Frame loss is declared when two out of five consecutive framing patterns are in error Exit FRAM and display TXYL 4 9 ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 4 Setup amp Configuration Table 4 3 CM 5RB Advanced Configuration Group Menu continued Function TXYL TYPE PRIM PLL CUST 4 10 Group Off On Auto ESF Default exit VRM T1 Default exit TERM DI A DI B SPAR exit Auto Default
44. Most significant bit of the delay setting Section A 4 Delay Setting with RS 232 Remote Port These digits must be set to zero Step non hitless change in depth Smooth hitless change in depth Second through ninth most significant bits of the delay setting Section A 4 Delay Setting with RS 232 Remote Port Eight least significant bits of the delay setting Section A 4 Delay Setting with RS 232 Remote Port Harris Corporation Intraplex Products A ISiCL CM 5RTD Delay Configuration ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Version 2 1 April 2011 Table A 2 Delay Feature S Codes Binary Digits S Valu Code T4824 5342 c42 55218629 557 e Description S01 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Phase locked loop PLL status To PLL is locked LOCK indicator light is on 1 PLL is not locked LOCK indicator light is off B 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 Buffer status T 0 Normal BUFFER indicator light is off 1 Overflow underflow in previous second BUFFER indicator is on Note the BUFFER indicator light reacts instantly while the buffer status bit remains 1 for about a second after the event B O0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Not Used tT T TITT T x S02 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Oorl The most significant bit of the programmed delay T setting BO 0 0 0 0 0 00 Not Used tT T T 1 71 1 2 S03 BO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Oorl The second through ninth most significant bits of the 7T 7 7117 111 programmed delay setting S04 Bi 0 0 0 0 0
45. Narr Wide exit Std Default KT STL FTI Description Transmit yellow alarm function RED not selected GREEN selected Yellow alarm is off never active Yellow alarm is on always active Automatically sends yellow alarm Automatically sends yellow alarm only in ESF Exit TXYL and display TYPE Multiplexer type This function sets the basic multiplexer type RED not selected GREEN selected Sets unit to run as a variable rate multiplexer Sets unit to run as an T1 multiplexer Exit TYPE and display PRIM Primary mode This function sets the primary operating mode for the CM 5RB module When the common module is first plugged in it determines its mode based on the setting of the DIP switches on the MA 215 MA 235 1 MA 235 2 or MA 217B module adapter You can use PRIM to override these switch settings RED not selected GREEN selected Sets the mode to terminal Sets the mode to DI A drop and insert multiplexer Sets the mode to DI B drop and insert multiplexer Sets the mode to spare inactive Exit PRIM and display PLL Phase locked loop filter This function sets the bandwidth of the filter in the phase locked loop PLL used to derive the transmit timing from the input T1 The PLL is used when the timing is set to loop through or external RED not selected GREEN selected Determines the width based on the timing in use narrow for loop or external timing wide for through timing Forces the set
46. Once frame synchronization is achieved the demultiplexer develops the proper demultiplexing bus signals and feeds them to all the channel modules plugged into the shelf Bus signals include e Demultiplexed channel data e Demultiplexing synchronization status e Synchronization signals necessary for proper decoding by the channel modules 2 1 3 5 Loopback Configurations The CM 5RB common module provides three loopback options Figure 2 4 e Line Use the line loopback to test the transmission path integrity and the T1 connections to the multiplexer This loopback takes the decoded T1 receive signal coming from the line receiver jitter buffer and loops it back to the T1 line driver input Receive data also passes on to the demultiplexer e Payload Use the payload loopback to verify CM 5RB module operation up to the bus interface to the channel modules Data also passes on to the receive side of the channel modules e Equipment Use the equipment loopback to test individual channel modules in the multiplexer It loops the transmit signals at the multiplexer output back to the demultiplexer input During equipment loopback the T1 output of the CM 5RB module is an all ones signal Section 5 2 3 2 Shelf Level and Common Module Remote Access gives more information on loopbacks 2 1 3 6 Microprocessor Control and Battery Backed Memory The microprocessor chip used on all Intraplex common modules contains a lithium battery which is an ine
47. Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 2 8 Power Supply Indicator Lights When On Light POWER green NORMAL green ALERT yellow ALARM red SUPPLY FAIL red Description The multiplexer has power Remains on if one of two installed power supplies has failed and the remaining supply has sufficient capacity to power the multiplexer No alert or alarm condition exists When the ACO switch is on indicates there is an alert at one or more channel modules These CM 5RB lights can assist in determining the alert condition RX IN is not on loss of receive signal RX IN is blinking receiving a yellow alarm LPBK is on internal loopback active LOOP INT EXT is blinking the fallback timing is activated and the primary timing mode that is used will be blinking SUPPLY FAIL is on only when two power supplies are installed Indicates a power supply failure When the ACO switch is on there is an alert at one or more channel modules When the ACO switch is on indicates there is an alert at one or more channel modules This light turns on briefly at power up These CM 5RB lights can assist in determining the alert condition CPU is on The central processor unit failed RX IN and FRM are on The signal is present but is out of frame TX OUT is on There is no transmit output Power supply failure the shelf is running on the supply whose SUPPLY FAIL light is not on As Table 2 8 indicates when a
48. Panel Connectors on ACS 165 Using MA 215 Module Adapters Connector for alarm signal battery MA 217B for O Available slots for module adapters o Figure 3 10 Rear Panel Connectors on ACS 168 Using MA 217B Module Adapters MA 217B for AC power input DI A CM 5RB If the multiplexer is not equipped for module and line redundancy there is an MA 215 or an MA 217B behind the CM 5RB module Both the MA 215 and MA 217B module adapters provide T1 remote port and timing connectors However the MA 215 adapter has an RJ 48C connector for the T1 circuit and the MA 217B adapter has a DB 15 connector for the T1 circuit Figure 3 11 shows the pin locations on both module adapter connectors Harris Corporation 3 11 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 3 Installation amp Wiring Version 2 11 August 2011 T1 signal connectors oooooooo ooooooo Clock timing input Clock timing output aco Ooz 4 Z NM M Remote control port T1 NTWK N T M D N G o E REMOTE REMOTE Figure 3 11 Connectors and Pin Locations on MA 215 and MA 217B If the multiplexer is equipped for module and line redundancy two CM 5RB common modules are installed in adjacent slots with both MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 adapters behind each A CA 202 shielded cable connects the two module adapters internally Note
49. Pin Description 1 External primary timing in positive 2 External primary timing in negative Pin 6 3 External timing source select Pini 4 Signal ground 5 External secondary timing in positive or CM 5R TD time delay control in positive 6 External secondary timing in negative or CM 5R TD time delay control in negative Table 3 12 outlines the external timing output connections for the MA 215 MA 235 1 MA 235 2 and MA 217B module adapter Table 3 12 MA 215 MA 235 1 MA 235 2 MA 217B Timing Out Port Pin Assignments Connector Pin Description 1 External timing out positive 2 External primary timing out negative Fre see 3 Signal ground Pin1 4 Signal ground 5 Auxiliary positive not defined 6 Auxiliary negative not defined 3 6 4 Remote Port Wiring Optional To take advantage of the optional remote monitoring and control feature of ACS 160 Series multiplexers connect a PC or ASCII terminal to the remote port on the MA 215 MA 235 1 MA 235 2 or MA 217B module adapter Connection to the remote port can be made either by direct wiring or via a dial up circuit using a modem Section 5 Remote Control Operation describes these options Intraplex can provide a cable and adapter RJ 11 to DB 9 for PC to common module port connections The MA 215 MA 235 1 MA 235 2 and MA 217B module adapters use an RJ 11 jack for the remote port Table 3 13 gives the pin assignments When connecting
50. STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 e Receive port 6 time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 1 time slot 24 The required time slot mapping for CrossConnect B is Receive port 1 time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 2 time slot 24 Receive port 2 time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 3 time slot 24 Receive port 3 time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 4 time slot 24 Receive port 4 time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 5 time slot 24 Receive port 5 time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 6 time slot 24 Receive port 6 time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 1 time slot 24 5 1 3 SCM I P Module IP Network You can set up an IP connection with the SCM IP shelf control module which provides Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP support for Intraplex products This module processes commands from an SNMP network manager a personal computer or workstation equipped with network management software and translates the SNMP into the Intraplex Simple Command Language ISiCL commands that other Intraplex products recognize The SCM IP module works in conjunction with an MA 440 module adapter You can install and configure the SCM IP module when you initially set up a network or you can add an SCM IP module to an existing network The IP port on the SCM IP module also serves as an interface to IntraGuide software running on any PC on the IP network Note You must use a 10BASE T crossover cable to conn
51. a drop insert multiplexer that is set to the DI A or DI B operating mode the only member of the TIME group is through timing THRU No user setup is necessary or allowed When the CM 5RB module is set up for use in a terminal multiplexer set to TERM mode four items appear in the TIME group INT Internal Ext External Loop Loop Send Not used In terminal multiplexers perform these steps to set the T1 transmitter timing mode to internal external or loop by setting the appropriate function in the TIME group Table 3 4 1 Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display reads TIME 2 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch to cycle through the available functions in the TIME group The green top bi level light turns on when the display shows the currently set selection and the red bottom light turns on when the display shows any other selection 3 To change the current timing setting press down on the SET NEXT switch until the display shows the desired setting and then press up twice on the SET NEXT switch After the first press the green top light blinks indicating a change is about to be made After the second press it turns on continuously indicating the timing source now on the display is active Harris Corporation 4 11 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 4 Setup amp Configuration Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 4 4 TI ME
52. all references to the ACS 165 multiplexer also apply to the ACS 168 multiplexer and all references to the ACS 166 multiplexer also apply to the ACS 169 multiplexer O Power HARRIS noRMAL ALERT ALARM INTRAPLEX ACCESS SERVER Figure 1 1 ACS 163 ACS 165 and ACS 166 Multiplexers Front View with cover INTRAPLEX STL HD POWER NORMAL ud Q TG E ALERT ALARM ACCESS SERVER Figure 1 3 ACS 167 ACS 168 and ACS 169 Multiplexers Front View with cover 1 4 Multiplexer Component Parts 1 4 1 Main Equipment Shelf The main equipment shelf is 19 wide rack mount 5 high for a 3RU multiplexer or 134 high for a 1RU multiplexer This equipment shelf has slots for e Plug in common modules e Channel modules e Module adapters e Power supplies Warning All common modules channel modules and power supplies must be inserted so that the white eject tab is at the bottom in a 3RU shelf and at the right in a 1RU shelf Harris Corporation 1 3 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 1 Introduction Version 2 11 August 2011 1 4 2 CM 5RB Common Modules There is one common module in a terminal multiplexer and two common modules in a dual terminal or drop and insert multiplexer Each CM 5RB common module provides one T1 port Section 1 5 CM 5RB User Interface gives details on this common module For optional time delay capability use the
53. and the RJ 48C connector RJ 48C connector 8 Figure 3 12 MA 215 MA 235 1 or MA 235 2 T1 Port and RJ 48C Connector Pin Orientation 3 12 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 3 Installation amp Wiring ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 3 6 2 1 Configure Integrated CSU The integrated CSU is pre configured at the factory and normally does not need additional options set Section 4 2 2 Display and Change Items in Basic Configuration Group gives information on setting different options 3 6 2 2 Configure Line Build Out When using the ACS 160 Series multiplexer s integrated CSU you must configure the line build out LBO according to the specifications from your T1 service provider Configure the CM 5RB module using the Configuration Group as this section describes The factory default is DSX 1 On the CM 5RB module press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display reads TSEL 2 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch until the display reads TLBO Notice that TLBO is underscored This indicates an additional subgroup 3 Press up once on the SET NEXT switch to display DSX which is the first of eight TLBO options DSX 200 333 467 595 7dB 154GB and exit The actual settings Table 3 8 differ from the displayed settings Table 3 8 Actual CSU Line Build Out Settings Display Actual Setting DSX OdB 0 to 133 ft 7db 7 5dB
54. are implemented as two separate adapters This arrangement is designed to allow replacement of a failed MA without interruption to the active service Harris Corporation 2 11 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 2 Functional Description Version 2 11 August 2011 2 1 4 4 Module Failure Detection and Switching If module redundancy is enabled detecting a failed primary module initiates a switch to the backup module within 500 milliseconds of the failure condition Module switching does not occur if e Backup module is in a failed state e Backup module has been removed from the shelf e Module redundancy has been turned off If both modules have failed service is interrupted If one module has failed a shelf alert is generated if a successful switchover to the remaining good module has occurred If a successful switchover has not occurred most likely due to module redundancy being turned off a shelf alarm is generated As a general rule a protection switch from the primary to the backup common module CM does not cause a switch to the backup T1 line The primary T1 line connected to the MA 235 1 module adapter is redirected through the CA 202 cable and the MA 235 2 module adapter to the backup CM 5RB module Figure 2 9 ensuring that traffic remains on the primary T1 line independent of the module switching activity System Bus channel Primary T1 Line dul
55. at a station in the ring or a station mode set incorrectly NETWK MGMT COMM OUT OF The station cannot detect the frame boundaries on incoming traffic This FRAME feature can be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect station mode CHANNEL CARD CONFLICT WITH The local channel module data is conflicting with outgoing network NTWK MGMT COMM management traffic For example if the DSO is set for time slot 12 and a channel module is programmed to transmit data in time slot 12 Channel module data has priority over network management traffic SWITCHED TO REDUNDANT The backup common module has been activated taking over the COMMON MODULE functions of the primary common module Determine Common Module Configuration You can use a CONFIG Command of the general form to determine the CM 5RB configuration setup lt Address gt lt Subaddress gt lt CONFIG gt For example to determine the current setup of the DI A module in an ACS 165 multiplexer with an address of 9 issue this command 9 DI A CONFIG The response to a CONFIG command always contains this setup information about the addressed CM 5RB module Primary timing mode Fallback timing mode T1 framing format T1 line code A typical response might be OK PTIME THRU PRIMARY TIMING FTIME INT FALLBACK TIMING FRAMING ESF CODE B8ZS In addition the response may contain one or more of these messages PAYLD LB ON PAYLOAD LO
56. connector also includes an RS 485 interface which can be used to create a daisy chain connection to other Intraplex systems The remote port for each CM 5RB module is located on its associated module adapter The MA 215 MA 217B and MA 235 2 module adapters have RJ 11 jacks for the remote port The pin assignments for this connector appear in Section 3 6 4 Remote Port Wiring Optional uc M ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series Multiplexer Command X PC or Terminal Figure 5 1 Direct Connection to Multiplexer Note You can also connect multiple CM 5RB modules in a daisy chain configuration with the output of a common module connected to the input of another common module using special Intraplex cables and adapters Harris Corporation 5 1 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series Multiplexer Remote Response lt Port ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series Command Multiplexer gt Remote Port PC or Terminal ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series Multiplexer RS 485 Figure 5 2 Daisy Chain Connection to Other Control Modules SCM IP Module ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series Multiplexer Remote Port IP Network ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series Multiplexer Re
57. e e Timeslot Multiplexer Direction Transmit Mode Data Rate 64 kbps slot fi TERM DIA Transmit side off e kbps fi time slot Signal E Loopback Mode 56 kbps slot eee Ses No loopback 1 time slot Transmit side PLL locked ME Select Performance Register Receive side PLL locked ecaro r ese Shelf reference PLL locked We Performance Register Value 5 Transmit clock output error detected a m Receive clock output error detected is X Mux Timeslots gt Bits per o Receive oe output error detected en seq 64k Handshake signal error detected e El QA 56k CAS Ext Timing e ISDN Figure 5 15 DS 64NC Status Screen You can use the IntraGuide interface to configure and test many other Intraplex channel modules The IntraGuide Help gives more information about IntraGuide channel module configurations and status displays 5 2 2 SNMP Support via SCM IP Module The SCM IP module provides Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP agent support for the Intraplex family of products This module processes commands from a network manager a personal computer or workstation equipped with network management software and translates the SNMP into the Intraplex Simple Command Language ISiCL commands that are recognized by Intraplex products SNMP is based on the manager agent model Most of the processing power and the data storage reside on the management system while a complementar
58. eee e eee ee eee eee eee eme e eene nsn 2 13 Table 2 4 BER Threshold Detection Times ccceceeceec cesses eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeaeeaeeaeeaees 2 14 Table 2 5 Fail Switching Precedence Rev Non Rev Line Redundancy amp Primary Line 2 14 Table 2 6 Fail Switching Precedence Non Revertive Line Redundancy amp Backup Line 2 15 Table 2 7 Alert Alarm Line Condition Dependencies ssesssss 2 16 Table 2 8 Power Supply Indicator Lights When On sssssssss eee etna ee enna 2 19 Table 3 1 Redundant CM 5RB FPUI 4 character Display with Power On 3 5 Table 3 2 MA 215 and MA 217B Module Adapter Components ssssssesssesess 3 6 Table 3 3 MA 215 MA 217B SW1 Switches and Functions sess 3 7 T ble 3 4 MA 235 1 lI Q POFtS ect aote OE erre eR eO RR E an RE ER ERREUR ET A a teca 3 8 Table 3 5 MA 235 2 1 O POTTS op nade aa aeaa nens eene ne he sess sss sre rese sean 3 9 Table 3 6 MA 235 1 Switch 1 Functions and Settings csssssssss 3 9 Table 3 7 MA 235 2 Switch 1 Functions and Settings essssssssssm 3 9 Table 3 8 Actual CSU Line Build Out Settings sss 3 13 Table 3 9 T1 I O Connector Pin Assignments on MA 215 MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 3 13 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 Table 3 13 Table 3 14 Table 3 15 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 6 Table 4 7 Table 4
59. for channel modules Figure 1 6 ACS 166 Multiplexer Front View no cover Power supply CM 57RB 5 slots for channel modules Figure 1 7 ACS 167 Multiplexer Front View no cover Harris Corporation 1 5 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 1 Introduction Version 2 11 August 2011 DI B CM 5RB DI A CM 5RB 4 slots for channel modules Figure 1 8 ACS 168 Multiplexer Front View No Cover Top CM 5RB controls these Two CM 5RBs Bottom CM 5RB controls channel modules ACS 169 only these channel modules Figure 1 9 ACS 169 Multiplexer Front View no cover MA 215 for Terminal strip 1 CM 5RB DC power Module adapters for common modules power SIG BAT BAT BAT BAT BAT A B ooco ALARMS ALERT ALARM NO COM NC NO COM NC DELLI FOR USE WITH Y SERIES POWER SUPSLIE SJO Terminal strip2 AC power in alert and alarm relays Figure 1 10 Equipped ACS 163 Multiplexer Rear View 0 OF OF O OO O L5 2 dt t ddif L i 1 d DO d d d gd d d I I 0 0 OF O OJ O MA 215 for each CM 5RB Figure 1 11 ACS 165 Multiplexer Rear View SIG BAT BAT BAT BAT BAT A B A B be ALARMS ALERT ALARM NO COM NC NO COM NC J K 00000 FOR USE WITH Y SERIES POWER SUPPLIES ONLY MADE INU SA 1 6 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 1 Introduction ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer In
60. frame Timing mode Loopback on CPU failure User I nterface Switches Group select Function select and set Alarm cut off Functionality Permits status inquiries at system and channel level and configuration of T1 and channel module parameters Remote Monitoring and Control Protocol Intraplex simple command language ISiCL I nterface RS 232C asynchronous Connector RJ 11s on the MA 215 and MA 217B module adapters A Status Constant monitoring of transmission equipment and timing with alert 9 Monitoring and alarm reporting P o Test J acks Bantam jacks for T1 input output signal T1 input output monitoring S Loopbacks T1 line loopback T1 equipment loopback payload loopback a 7 2 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 7 Specifications Alert and Alarm Reporting Performance Monitoring Channel Modules Alarm Conditions Alert Conditions Equipment Transmission Timing Alarm Relay Alert Relay Contact Rating Connector Compliant with AT amp T Pub 54016 Compliant with ANSI T1 403 Slot Assignment Capacity Harris Corporation Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 CPU failure Alarm at one or more channel modules Receive signal present but out of frame Loss of transmission output Loopback active Alert at one or more channel modules Single power supply failure when two power supplies are installed Alarm
61. includes four common modules connected through a central cross connect node A common DSO channel is shared for DSO management communications among all the common module units connected to the DCS system 5 CM 5RB g Slave PF o el CM 5RB o Master x EI n o Ee E CM 5RB 9 Slave wa m Time Slot Cross Connect 2 9 z CM 5RB o Slave al n CM 95 3 o 5 CM 5RB CrossConnect a Slave E Figure 5 7 DSO Communication on CrossConnect Star Configuration 5 9 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 Ring Configurations A variety of ring configurations are possible using Intraplex CrossConnect products In general the rings are formed by cross connections within CrossConnect units T1 lines extend from the ring to terminating T1 CrossConnect multiplexers using common modules You can also form rings using drop and insert multiplexers connected to each CrossConnect node Control Group Configurations Each set of controlled CM 5RB modules can be cascaded into a control group configuration Larger configurations can be supported but have a corresponding reduction in network management response time Figure 5 8 shows six CM 5RB modules in three separate control groups controlled by one network computer at a single location
62. information Tables 5 11 and 5 14 provide typical STATUS and CONFIG examples If the received command is invalid if for example it contains an unrecognizable command or an invalid sub address or the user attempts to send a SET command while the remote port is locked the addressed multiplexer responds with one of three response formats WHAT or WHAT descriptive message or WHAT descriptive message rest of descriptive message In all cases the last line of an ISiCL response and only the last line terminates with a semicolon All responses are immediately followed by a carriage return and line feed CR LF Note If you plan to download ACS 160 Series setup information or poll ACS 160 multiplexers for status information using a computer or any other type of automated controller be aware that flow control must be handled by the controller itself Generally the controller software must be programmed to wait until it has received a response to the last command sent to a given multiplexer before issuing another command to the same multiplexer Harris Corporation 5 23 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 5 2 3 2 Shelf Level and Common Module Remote Access Use LOCK and UNLOCK Commands Each CM 5RB module can be remotely locked or unlocked using the LOCK UNLOCK command pair W
63. jack RS 485 6 pin phone TTL jack 8 pin phone T1 E1 jacks 26 pin TTL subminiature D Comments Balanced timing in 1 544 MHz Balanced timing out 1 544 MHz Port has electrical protection per FCC part 68 for connection to a public network External cable required with package CA 202 Comments Standard ISiCL port interface Future use Port has electrical protection per FCC part 68 for connection to a public network External cable required Signals TIMING INT and TIMING IN TIMING OUT and TIMING OUT RXTIP RXRING TXRING and TXTIP Various Signals RXDATA TXDATA GND RS485 and RS485 RXTIP RXRING TXRING and TXTIP Various 3 Installation amp Wiring Pin Assignments 1 External primary positive 2 External primary negative 3 External timing source select 4 Signal ground 5 Ext secondary positive or CM 5R TD delay positive 6 Ext secondary negative or CM 5R TD delay negative 1 External positive 2 External negative 3 Signal ground 4 Signal ground 5 Aux positive not defined 6 Aux negative not defined 1 Receive from network ring 2 Receive from network tip 3 Not used 4 Send towards network ring 5 Send towards network tip 6 Not used 7 Frame ground transmit 8 Frame ground receive Pinouts not necessary Pin Assignments 1 RS 485 negative 2 RS 232 tran
64. keep the current address do nothing or press down on the GROUP switch to exit the ADDR group and perform some other setup operation 4 To change the current address press down on the SET NEXT switch a second time to begin the address editing process The display changes to show all four digits smaller with one digit underscored For example if the current multiplexer address is 0001 the display now shows 0001 At this point each time you press down on the SET NEXT switch the underscore moves one digit to the right and each time you press up on the SET NEXT switch the currently underscored digit is raised by one Pressing down on the SET NEXT switch once 0001 pressing up on the SET NEXT switch once 1001 5 Continue pressing up or down on the SET NEXT switch until the desired address appears Address 0000 is reserved choose any number from 0001 to 9999 6 Once the display is edited to the desired value press down on the SET NEXT switch until the underscore disappears and the digits are again displayed full size For example if the displayed address was changed to 0040 the display now reads 0040 The red bottom light is on indicating the display is not the current address 7 To change the multiplexer s network address to the number on the display press up twice on the SET NEXT switch Harris Corporation 5 3 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5
65. module no longer requiring a separate channel module The CM 5RTD option provides a programmable time delay of between 6 and 131076 bit times between 3 89 and 84 89 milliseconds in the module s receive path Harris Corporation 4 19 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 4 Setup amp Configuration Version 2 11 August 2011 4 7 1 CM 5RTD Setup If your ACS 160 Series multiplexer has the optional delay capability it has a CM 5RTD common module The CM 5RTD module allows you to program a time delay in the receive T1 path 4 7 1 1 Delay Feature Activation To activate the delay feature perform these steps This feature is normally activated at the factory before shipment 1 Access the Advanced Configuration Group 2 Press the SET NEXT switch down until Topt is displayed 3 Note which On Off indicator light is on If the red light is on the delay feature is off If the green light is on the feature is on 4 Press SET NEXT up twice to toggle the delay feature on or off When the delay feature is on the TDLY item is available in the Basic Configuration Group Menu 4 7 1 2 CM 5RTD Sub address With Topt set on as in previous procedure perform these steps to set the time delay Subaddress This value is the card subaddress for the time delay module incorporated into the CM 5RTD module The card subaddress can be set from 1 through 36 1 On the basic configuratio
66. more channel modules alert indicator light on the module s in the alert state is on Excess jitter e Loss of network management communications continuity e Network management communications are out of frame e Channel card conflict e Switching to a redundant common module Harris Corporation 6 7 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting Version 2 11 August 2011 6 3 5 2 Alarm Conditions In the factory default setting for most applications except STL PLUS Section 6 3 5 3 the ACS 160 signals an ALARM condition when one or more of these events occurs e Loss of receive signal RX IN indicator light is off e CPU failed CPU indicator light on e Signal present but out of frame RX IN and FRM indicator light is on e No transmit output TX OUT indicator light is off e Alarm at one or more channel modules Alarm indicator lights on the card s in alarm state is on The ALARM indicator light also turns on briefly when power is first applied to the system 6 3 5 3 Studio Transmitter Link STL Alarms The CM 5RB module has a selectable set of alarm conditions specifically for STL applications The STL alarm criteria include changes to these alarms e AIS e TXOUT e BER You can change the CM 5RB module from the factory default standard alarms to the STL alarm using the advanced configuration group Section 4 3 CM 5RB Advanced Configuratio
67. necessary to set up and use the network address The network address is necessary when two or more multiplexers are connected to a central controller The address provides a means of identifying which multiplexer or more specifically which CM 5RB module was addressed when reviewing the records of such commands The two CM 5RB modules in an ACS 165 drop and insert multiplexer should be assigned the same network address Commands can still be targeted to one CM 5RB module or the other in a drop and insert multiplexer by including the appropriate sub address either DI A or DI B sub addresses are covered in Section 5 2 3 1 ISiCL Command Line Format Give the two CM 5RB modules in an ACS 166 dual terminal multiplexer different addresses To prevent unauthorized or accidental changes multiplexer addresses cannot be changed remotely Rather each multiplexer s address must be entered locally usually at the time of installation To view and if desired change the current network address of an ACS 160 Series multiplexer perform these steps Table 5 1 1 Press up or down on the GROUP switch one or more times until the display shows ADDR 2 Press down on the SET NEXT switch one time The function display shows the current four digit address of the multiplexer for example 0001 Also the green top section of the bi level indicator light next to the function display turns on to indicate that the displayed address is the current address 3 To
68. off MSTR Set the multiplexer to master mode SLV Set the multiplexer to slave mode BRDG Set the multiplexer to bridge mode RATE DSO data rate 8 KB Set the data rate to 8 Kbps 1 bit DSO 16 KB Set the data rate to 16 Kbps 2 bits DSO 32 KB Set the data rate to 32 Kbps 4 bits DSO 64 KB Set the data rate to 64 Kbps 8 bits DSO TSLT Set the time slot used for DSO communications to and from the DSO interface 1 to 24 T1 setting ndicates factory default These control settings must be made on each CM 5RB basic menu COMM group for successful communication on a DSO network e Set the common module to master slave or bridge mode default off e Select a data rate of 8 16 32 or 64 kbps default 32 kbps e Select a DSO communications time slot default Time Slot 24 for T1 CM 5RB modules in a redundant configuration primary and backup must have the same data rate and DSO time slot in the COMM menu group The remote port setup for the redundant CM 5RB modules primary and backup must also match A backup CM 5RB module is not addressable by the network until it becomes active 5 1 2 1 Common Module DSO Configuration A network must have a single master primary station that controls all the communications and one or more slave secondary stations Only one slave can be transmitting at any time therefore the master controls all slave transmissions The bridge mode is used during maintenance allowing network communicati
69. operation The redundant power supply is optional and is not available for 1RU shelves Note An additional power supply is for redundancy only For example a 60 watt shelf with two power supplies should only use 60 watts of power to assure that if one power supply fails the configuration does not overload the existing power supply Power supply modules require no special setup As long as they are plugged into their slots and system power is applied they are operating Figure 2 11 shows the key system status indicator lights and the Alert and Alarm relays on the power supply module These status indicator lights and relays respond to fault conditions detected in the e Multiplexer e T1 circuit e Channel modules installed in the shelf POWER LED VISIBLE WITH COVER ATTACHED NORMAL LED VISIBLE WITH COVER ATTACHED ALERT LED VISIBLE WITH COVER ATTACHED gt POWER SUPPLY MODULE FAIL LED gt ALARM LED VISIBLE WITH COVER ATTACHED gt Figure 2 11 Y Series Power Supply Indicator Lights Table 2 8 lists the indicator light meanings These four indicator lights are visible when the front cover of the multiplexer is closed e POWER e NORMAL e ALERT e ALARM The SUPPLY FAIL indicator light s are not visible when the cover is closed 2 18 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 2 Functional Description ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp
70. or the other supply is removed Because the corresponding relay contacts on the main and redundant supplies are connected in parallel the ACO switches on both must be on to activate the alarm cut off Harris Corporation 6 21 Intraplex Products This page is left blank intentionally 6 22 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 7 1 T1 Outputs T1 Inputs Section 7 Specifications Detailed Specifications Rate Pulse Shape Formats Line Codes Line Build Out Output J itter Connector Rate Pulse Shape Input impedance Line Code Frame Format Frame Synchronization Average Reframe Time Robustness Burst Error Tolerance Dynamic Range Jitter Tolerance Jitter Attenuation Connector Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 1 544 Mbps 30 ppm using internal timing Per ANSI T1 403 Extended superframe ESF per ANSI T1 403 1995 and AT amp T 62411 D4 superframe SF per AT amp T 43801 Bipolar with 8 zero substitution B8ZS Alternate mark inversion AMI Up to 655 feet from standard DSX or CSU LBO O 7 5 or 15dB Less than 0 05 UI per AT amp T PUB 62411 using internal timing RJ 48C on MA 215 MA 217B MA 235 1 MA 235 2 module adapters DB 15P on the MA 216 module adapter 1 544 Mbps 100 ppm not loop or through timed 1 544 Mbps 50 ppm loop or through timed Per ANSI T1 403 100 ohms resistive nominal B8ZS or AMI ESF or SF Proprietary frame synchronization algorithm for high to
71. primary line becomes better than the backup line NOBK No backup line Notifies controlling CM that no backup line is available In this condition module only redundancy is implemented If primary line fails the controlling CM does not switch to the backup line Also shelf alerts and alarms are not generated based on the backup line condition OFF Never switch lines due to line failure Line failure integration time Line redundancy reversion switch delay time Line failure criteria Excessive Bit Error Rate Line failure is declared if BER exceeds user defined threshold Bit Error Rate BER threshold from 1 x 10 3 to 1 x 10 6 Line failure criteria Out of frame OOF line failure is declared if receiving OOF Line failure criteria Loss of signal LOS line failure is declared if receiving LOS Line failure criteria Alarm Indication Signal AIS line failure is declared if receiving AIS Line failure criteria Unavailable Signal State UAS Line failure is declared if line is in Unavailable Signal State Line failure criteria Yellow alarm line failure is declared if receiving Yellow alarm Note Module redundancy ISiCL commands and some line redundancy commands have no operational effect on the primary CM 5RB module If the module adapter type is not MA 235 1 or MA 235 2 MA type is auto detected line redundancy mode is deactivated In both instances from the perspective of the network manager the ISiCL s
72. situations If you have reached what appears to be a dead end or if the information in this section does not seem to apply to your case please contact Harris Customer Service at 217 222 8200 for assistance in troubleshooting your ACS 160 Series system 6 6 1 Trouble Types ACS 160 Series system troubles fall into these three basic categories Figure 6 11 e Setup errors e T1 network problems e ACS 160 Series equipment problems The basic objective of any troubleshooting is to determine the type and location of a problem Once you make this determination taking one of these actions usually restores the ACS 160 Series system e For setup problems re configure the multiplexer or multiplexers that are not set up correctly e For public network problems work with your Local or Inter Exchange carrier to correct the situation For private network problems consult the network manager e For equipment problems replace the bad module or modules with spares 6 6 2 Troubleshooting Guidelines Remember these guidelines to troubleshoot an ACS 160 Series system e n general always check for setup errors before performing in service or out of service tests Setup problems might not appear immediately For example if at installation time both multiplexers in a point to point system are incorrectly set to use AMI instead of B8ZS line coding errors might not occur until later when a data pattern with insufficient ones density is transmitted
73. status is not refreshed All channel modules in the shelf are read to retrieve the most recent information This process may take a second or two During this period if a channel module status query is given an error message is generated TERM C5 STATUS lt CR gt WHAT WAIT SCANNING CHANNEL MODULES 5 2 3 7 Channel Module Configuration To determine the configuration of a given channel module in an ACS 160 Series multiplexer issue a CONFIG command in this form lt Address gt Cn CONFIG where n is the number of the target channel module For example to determine the setup of channel module 4 in multiplexer 20 issue this command 20 C4 CONFIG The response to a valid channel module CONFIG command has this general form OK CHANNEL CARD nn TYPE mmm UNDER REMOTE or LOCAL CONTROL SRVC ON or OFF one or more lines stating the values of each P setup parameter Table 5 13 gives an example of a typical response to a CONFIG command issued to a PT 153 program audio transmitter Harris Corporation 5 33 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 5 13 Typical CONFIG Response and Meaning Response Meaning OK Valid command received CHANNEL CARD 3 TYPE 202 Module SCB address 3 is a PT 153 module UNDER REMOTE CONTROL Remote control is on SRVC ON Serv
74. the THRU timing The light blinks to show that although this timing setting is the primary one the multiplexer is presently using fallback internal timing Perform one or more channel tests on 4 wire voice channels or full duplex data channels that terminate through the DI A CM 5RB module if such channels are present as in the previous terminal multiplexer test procedure When channel tests are complete take down the loopback on the DI A CM 5RB module by removing the patch cord between the T1 OUT EQUIP and T1 IN EQUIP jacks or by de activating its equipment loopback EqLB Remove the patch cord or termination plug that was plugged into the T1 IN EQUIP jack of the DI B CM 5RB module Using a patch cord loop back the DI B CM 5RB module by connecting its T1 OUT EQUIP jack with its T1 IN EQUIP jack or activate the equipment loopback EqLB in the DI B module At this point both drop and insert CM 5RB modules should be timed by the signal coming from the terminal multiplexer at Location 1 which has already been tested Therefore the fallback timing trick is not needed to test the DI B CM 5RB module Once the DI B module is looped verify that the indicator lights are responding Table 6 8 With the DI B module looped perform all desired local loopback tests on the transmit receive channel modules that are set up to terminate circuits coming in via the DI B module These tests might include loss measurements on voice and progr
75. the next SIO function To exit the SIO group altogether press up or down on the GROUP switch 5 1 1 5 Parity Mode Selection To display and change the current parity mode perform these steps 1 Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until SIO appears 2 Press down on the SET NEXT switch to display PAR 3 Press up once on the SET NEXT switch The display now shows SPACE which is the first of four available parity modes If parity mode is set to SPACE every parity bit is set to zero 4 Press down on the SET NEXT switch additional times to see the other available modes e Mark e Even Odd If parity mode is set to Mark every parity bit is set to one If parity mode is set to Odd or Even parity bits are set to create odd or even parity for each data byte The green top indicator light turns on when the display is the same as the current setting and the red bottom indicator light turns on when the display is not the same as the current setting 5 To change the current parity setting advance the display to the desired setting and press up twice on the SET NEXT switch After the first press the green top light blinks indicating a change is about to be made After the second press it turns on continuously indicating the display matches the current setting The fifth function in the PAR subgroup is exit When the exit function is displayed you can press up on the SET NEXT switch to leave the PAR subgroup and display Lock
76. the next SIO function To exit the SIO group altogether press up or down on the GROUP switch 5 1 1 6 Lock Function Use The Lock function locks and unlocks the remote port When the remote port is locked setup changes cannot be made remotely preventing accidental or unauthorized system setup changes through the remote port To unlock a multiplexer via the remote port you must send the proper command and password During setup you select a password which can be any collection of letters and numbers up to 16 characters in length The Use LOCK and UNLOCK Commands subsection of Section 5 2 3 2 describes the use of locking commands and passwords The lock function has no effect on local operation a multiplexer can be unlocked locally using the GROUP and SET NEXT toggle switches even if its password has been lost To access the Lock function directly perform these steps 1 Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until SIO appears 2 Press down on the SET NEXT switch until Lock is displayed As mentioned previously you can also access the Lock function from the PAR subgroup by displaying its exit function and pressing up on the SET NEXT switch 3 When the display shows Lock the green top indicator light turns on if the multiplexer remote port is locked and the red bottom indicator light turns on if it is unlocked To toggle the state of the remote port from locked to unlocked or unlocked to locked press up twice on the SET NEX
77. the remote port to a modem use a null modem cable a null modem cable provides a standard RS 232 DCE to DCE connection Harris Corporation 3 15 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 3 Installation amp Wiring Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 3 13 MA 215 MA 235 1 MA 235 2 MA 217B Remote Port Pin Assignments Connector Pin Description 1 RS 485 negative 2 RS 232 transmit UN ses 3 Not used Pini 4 RS 232 receive 5 Signal ground 6 RS 485 positive On a dual terminal or drop and insert multiplexer each CM 5RB module is controlled from the remote port on its corresponding module adapter so each must be connected separately For a dial up connection you can use a code operated switch to control both CM 5RB modules via one dial up line 3 6 5 Power and Alarm Connection Wiring Table 3 14 defines the power and alarm terminals on a 3RU shelf and lists the equivalent connection points on a 1RU shelf these equivalents are pins of the DB 15 alarms connector Figures 3 16 3 17 and 3 18 show the typical power connections to a 3RU shelf Figure 3 19 shows the typical connections to a 1RU shelf Table 3 14 Power and Alarm Connectors Terminal 1RU on 3RU Shelf Shelf Pins Description GND screw Pin 13 Chassis GROUND SIG BAT Pin 15 48VDC SIGNALI NG BATTERY input For connection to an external signaling voltage source when this is needed by one or more channel mod
78. there are fewer than 2 errored seconds in the most recent 15 minutes of operation This Event is asserted for a minimum of 15 minutes e The 5 15 Event is declared if 5 or more errored seconds are detected in the most recent 15 minutes of operation and is cleared if there are fewer than 5 errored seconds in the most recent 15 minutes of operation This Event is asserted for a minimum of 15 minutes e The 86 24 Event is declared if 86 or more errored seconds are detected in the most recent 24 hours of operation and is cleared if there are fewer than 86 errored seconds in the most recent 24 hours of operation This Event is asserted for a minimum of 15 minutes In FTI mode UAS is an alert if it does not interrupt service that is if the UAS condition is on the non active line and is an alarm if it interrupts service that is if the UAS condition is on the active line In non FTI modes UAS is an alert or alarm condition under these same circumstances but only if it is selected as a line switching criterion In FTI mode and in UAS the CM 5RB module e Sends a T1 yellow alarm e Asserts an out of frame condition to all channel modules which has the effect of muting audio on most program audio and voice channel modules and asserting control signals on datacom to an idle or off state e Changes the receive data sent to channel modules to all ones Like UAS the Bit Error Rate BER is an alert alarm only if it has been selected as a li
79. unit call the Harris Customer Service to determine whether the configuration may in fact overload the power supply Remember to include the CM 5RB common modules and their module adapters at 3 6 watts for each set of common module and module adapter with one set in a terminal multiplexer and two in a dual terminal or drop and insert multiplexer Redundant CM 5RB modules must also be included in calculating total power consumption For example a drop and insert multiplexer with a 50 watt power supply and full common module redundancy has 37 6 watts available for channel modules on its main shelf 50 watts minus 12 4 watts for four CM 5RB modules and 2 module adapters A 60 watt power supply provides 47 6 watts for channel modules and a 95 watt power supply has 82 6 watts for channel modules 3 6 7 Power Application After all equipment has been installed and wired perform these steps to apply power to each shelf 1 Verify that all modules common channel and power are seated snugly 2 If the shelf is AC powered plug in the AC line cord If the ACS OPT1 dual AC power feed option is installed plug in both AC line cords If the shelf is DC powered insert the external power fuse 4 Verify that the POWER indicator light is on and the POWER FAIL indicator light is off In a 3RU shelf both the MAIN POWER FAIL and REDUNDANT POWER FAIL indicator lights should be off Ignore all other lights on the shelf for now e If no lights for any
80. up the module tries to acquire the assigned IP address If you select the option Obtain I P address using DHCP on the TCP IP Configuration Web page Figure 4 15 these actions occur when the system powers up 1 The SCM IP module requests an IP address from the DHCP Server 2 If the IP address request from the DHCP Server fails the module uses the default IP address 192 168 0 100 Also on that same TCP IP Configuration page you can select Use this I P address and mask In this case you must type an IP address and the subnet mask associated with this address Harris Corporation 5 13 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 Then when you click Submit the fixed IP address is programmed into the module You must reboot the SCM IP module before you can log on to the Web browser or Telnet using the new fixed IP address The Intraplex SCM 1 SCM IP Shelf Control Modules Installation amp Operation Manual gives more information on using the SCM IP module and interface to configure and operate your ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series multiplexer 5 2 User Interfaces You can access your multiplexer system using any of these Intraplex remote control methods e IntraGuide Configuration and Management Software e SNMP via the SCM IP module e Intraplex Simple Command Language ISiCL The next subsections discuss these methods 5 2 1
81. 1 TYPE 12 UNDER REMOTE CONTROL SRVC ON P01 0 B00000000 P02 0 B00000000 P03 3 B00000011 P04 135 B10000111 When using binary numbers in the parameter field of a SET command they must be preceded by the letter B For example multiplexer address gt lt card address gt SET P02 B00000001 Harris Corporation A 1 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Version 2 1 April 2011 Table A 1 Delay Feature P Codes P Code PO1 P02 P03 P04 A 2 A 2 Binary Digits 1 52 2 23305843 551 962 7258 Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 T 1 0 0 00 0 0 00 Not used TIT TITUT IT T 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0or1 T 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 Not used T T T T 1 1 0 0 0 T 1 0 0 00 0 000 Oorl TITITITITITITIT 00 0000 00 Oorl TITITITITITITIT Delay S Codes There are four S codes for the delay feature of a CM 5RTD module Table A 2 defines these S codes which appear in response to a STATUS query Like the P codes the S codes are displayed in both decimal and binary form OK CHANNI S01 S02 S03 S04 EL CARD 1 TYPI E 12 0 B00000000 0 T3 B00000000 B10000111 3 B00000011 S r A ISiCL CM 5RTD Delay Configuration Description Sets normal polarity for the RS 422 control input Sets inverted polarity for the RS 422 control input can correct for reversed wires at the RS 422 interface These digits must be set to zero
82. 1 Added height to 3RU and 1RU references in introduction 1 3 1 2 LD Updated information for Power Supplies 1 4 1 4 Added replaceable battery warning to end of Microprocessor Control 2 1 3 6 2 6 and Battery Backed Memory section Updated Power Supply Modules information 2 1 5 2 18 Reworded warning at end of Module Adapters section 2 1 7 2 22 Added height to Multiplexer Shelf Installation guidelines 3 3 3 2 a 3 4 2 3 4 Removed RING GEN from Figures 3 3 3 10 3 16 3 19 and Table 3 16 as the pur f this connection has changed vs ce 16 as the purpose of this connection has changed 3 6 5 318 3 20 Updated Table 3 17 Nominal Power Requirements for Common 3 6 6 3 22 Modules and Module Adapters and warning Reworded paragraph following warning Corrected voltage for Power Supply Test 6 6 4 6 20 Version 2 1 cont 2 02 2 01 Date 4 29 2011 10 1 2010 6 16 2010 4 23 2010 Revisions Made Corrected Specs Consumption PSY5024 and PSY100AC Output Power and 1RU Shelf Output Power Added Regulatory Compliance Combined Wiring and Power sections into Wiring amp Power section Added Available Power subsection Renamed Channel Module Addition to Existing Systems to Channel Module Installation subsection Added Shelf Power for Additional Channel Modules subsection and renumbered other subsections as needed Corrected the model list on cover changing ACS 160 to ACS 169 and adding ACS 168 model Made global correct
83. 1 Frame Format amp Line Code TSEL Group ssseeeeeene 4 17 4 5 1 CSU Config ratlon isnt HR Rea E RRRTEEE MERE EErEE Aaa ie 4 17 4 5 2 Framing and Line Code Configuration ccecceeeee eect e eee eee eee ee ene 4 18 4 6 Redundant CM 5RB Modules REDN Group ccceceee cette eee teed 4 19 4 7 Optional Integrated CM 5RTD Time Delay TDLY Group 4 19 4 7 i CMP5RTDB Setup os sss eere oor hot pe Puce ag Sad a eb era E Ure e rtu e or a 4 20 4 722 Operatlofis c riter Rr nes erede d Ipsi pei ened ds 4 20 4 8 CM 5RB Module and Line Redundancy MRDN amp LRDN Groups 4 21 Section 5 Remote Control Operation e D 1 Bal Physical Connectors oed Lo odes Ee eta rr Leine dO eu leet adios 5 1 e EM i o p P detectives EETA ETEEN ESAE dee tus aa 5 1 5 1 2 DSO Management Communications cece ce eee eee eee neta menm 5 7 5 1 3 SCM IP Module IP Network cccccccececeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeaeesaeeesateneaeenes 5 13 5 2 eer Interfaces oss oi e reef rb d ede a duse eens aoro cele de 5 14 5 2 1 IntraGuide Software neiii p a esee eene ness tese senten ens 5 14 5 2 2 SNMP Support via SCM IP Module sssssssss mmm 5 18 5 2 3 Intraplex Simple Command Language ISiCL ssseseseeseseeesess 5 18 ii Harris Corporation Intraplex Products Table of Contents ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Insta
84. 15db 15dB 4 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch until the display reads the line build out specified by your T1 provider 5 Press up twice on the SET NEXT switch After the first press the green top light blinks indicating that a change is about to be made After the second press it turns on continuously indicating that your selection for the line build out is active 3 6 2 3 Wire ACS 160 Series Multiplexer with Integrated CSU to T1 On a drop and insert multiplexer wire the T1 circuits intended for DI A and DI B to the MA 215 behind the CM 5RB modules designated as DI A physical slot 1 and DI B physical slot 2 respectively On an ACS 166 multiplexer the CM 5RB modules for the two independent terminals are located in physical slots 1 and 10 On an ACS 169 the CM 5 modules are located in physical slots 3 and 4 The T1 circuit can be wired to the T1 I O connector DB 15 on the MA 217B or the T1 I O connector RJ 48C in the MA 215 MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 module adapters Table 3 9 lists the pin assignments for the T1 1 O RJ 48C connector for these module adapters Table 3 9 T11 O Connector Pin Assignments on MA 215 MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 Connector Pin Description 1 Receive from network ring RJ 48C 2 Receive from network tip connector 3 Not used 4 Send towards network ring 5 Send towards network tip s 6 Not used 7 Frame ground transmit 8 Frame ground receive Harris Corporation 3 13 Intraplex Product
85. 1RU shelf in parentheses if it is different 1 Connect the GND screw pin 13 of the Alarms connector on a 1RU shelf to station ground 2 If the shelf is AC powered verify that the AC cord is available Do not plug the cord into the AC source yet 3 If the shelf is DC powered a Verify that a 2A slow blow external fuse is available in the DC power line to protect the multiplexer Remove this fuse and do not replace it until you are ready to power up turn on the shelf Warning This fuse must be provided both to protect the multiplexer and to provide a safe means of removing power from a DC powered shelf b Connect the BAT A terminal the black pigtail lead on a 1RU shelf to the negative terminal of the station battery c Connect the BAT A terminal both the green and white pigtail leads on a 1RU shelf to the positive terminal of the station battery tied to ground 4 Connect SIG BAT pin 15 on a 1RU shelf to signaling battery This step is required only if the shelf contains 4 wire E amp M voice modules using Type I II or III signaling Check with Intraplex Customer Service if you are not sure whether this battery is necessary If the shelf is DC powered a separate signal battery is not required connect SIG BAT and chassis ground to the DC power source Warning When using a separate signaling battery place an in line slow blow fuse The fuse should be 1A for up to 12 voice circuits or 2A for 13 to 24 circ
86. 3 Figure 1 14 Figure 1 15 Figure 1 16 Figure 1 17 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 18 Figure 2 19 Figure 2 20 Figure 2 21 Figure 2 22 Figure 2 23 Figure 2 24 Figure 2 25 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figures ACS 163 ACS 165 and ACS 166 Multiplexers Front View with cover 1 3 STL 163 STL 165 and STL 166 Multiplexers Front View with cover ssssse 1 3 ACS 167 ACS 168 and ACS 169 Multiplexers Front View with cover 1 3 ACS 163 Multiplexer Front View no cover meme mene nnns 1 4 ACS 165 Multiplexer Front View no cover isssssesseen mmm emm nn 1 5 ACS 166 Multiplexer Front View no cover issssssesseen meme nns 1 5 ACS 167 Multiplexer Front View no cover emen mene nnn nns 1 5 ACS 168 Multiplexer Front View no cover nmm nnns 1 6 ACS 169 Multiplexer Front View no cover menm nnns 1 6 Equipped ACS 163 Multiplexer Rear View sssssee emen 1 6 ACS 165 Multiplexer Rear View sssssssssese mmm mmm 1 6 ACS 166 Multiplexer Rear View sssssssssses mmm eminem enemies 1 7 ACS 167 Multiplexer Rear View sssssssses mme emnes 1 7 ACS 168 Multiplexer Rear View sssssssssseemm He emen
87. 400 e mail Intraplex harris com www broadcast harris com Copyright 2011 Harris Corporation
88. 6 9096 non condensing 5 25 inches 3RU 1 75 inches 1RU Compatible with EIA standard RS 310 19 inch equipment racks 14 75 inches from mounting plane not including user supplied connectors 0 75 inches from mounting plane with front door closed 3RU 11 Ib 5 kg approximate with no channel modules installed 15 Ib 6 8 kg typical when fully loaded 1RU 10 Ib 4 5 kg approximate with no channel modules installed 11 Ib 5 kg typical when fully loaded CE compliant FCC Part 15 Part 68 UL 1950 CS 03 CTR12 CTR13 Specifications are subject to change without notice 7 2 Notice of FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his her own expense Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures H
89. 7 6 6 1 Trouble Types eet re mure me O ARE RUE RM HEU RM RR ERE A EE NE ee 6 18 6 6 2 Troubleshooting Guidelines cece eect eee eee teen mmm 6 18 6 6 3 Typical Troubleshooting Procedure cccce eee e eee e ee eee eee teeta eee na teeta 6 18 6 6 4 Power Supply lest s eet eae exer Sd eR Bi aa ind ERR MR aaa ee 6 19 6 6 5 Alert and Alarm Troubleshooting ccccece eee e eee eee eee ee eee mmn 6 20 Section 7 SPecCifICatlons sivciceciviisiciesiwsenineewiarietewinciwrewieciecewininenn T 7 1 Detailed Specifications e ee ede e e edet 7 1 7 2 Notice OF FCC Compliance 122 troie ars Aare and Ao eu evt Pep ides 7 5 Appendix A l SICL CM 5RTD Delay Configuration mener ER A X D lay P Codes scie le ee cad eb a d d edet a e Kal edes A 1 A 2 Delay S C9d0655 3 nii ode neu ad cate a eiui A 2 A 3 CMSSRID ODGOESEOFE erimni rece aea e Da E S TE eani ARI FERRI dads ERE EPERI ANS A 3 A 4 Delay Setting with RS 232 Remote Port sseseseseseeeeeeeese A 4 A 5 Delay Setting with RS 422 Control Port ccc ceece cece eee e ee eee eee eees A 5 Harris Corporation iii Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Table of Contents Version 2 11 August 2011 Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Figure 1 11 Figure 1 12 Figure 1 1
90. 8 Table 4 9 vi T1 I O Connector Pin Assignments on MA 217B sssssessee 3 14 MA 215 MA 235 1 MA 235 2 MA 217B Timing In Port Pin Assignments 3 15 MA 215 MA 235 1 MA 235 2 MA 217B Timing Out Port Pin Assignments 3 15 MA 215 MA 235 1 MA 235 2 MA 217B Remote Port Pin Assignments 3 16 Power and Alarm Connectors csssssssssssssssssssesee mene 3 16 Nominal Power Requirements for Common Modules and Module Adapters 3 19 CM 5RB Basic Configuration Group cc cece eect ee eee eee memes 4 3 Primary CM 5RB Initial Display ssessssssss Hmmm 4 6 CM 5RB Advanced Configuration Group Menu cceeeeeee eee ee eee teeta eee tees 4 9 TIME GT TOUD inaia LEM 4 12 Timing Status Indicator Lights sss mme 4 12 Timing Status FUNCtIONS iei cece ee memes meses esent enne 4 13 Channel Service Unit CSU Configurations cesses 4 18 Framing and Line Coding Configurations ssesssssse 4 18 REDN Group Menu Functions sssssssssss memes menn enne 4 19 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products Table of Contents ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 1 August 2011 Table 4 10 CM 5RTD Indicator Lights cece cece eee e eee eee mme meme nennen 4 21 Table 4 11 MRDN Group Menu Functions sesssssssssm mmm eene 4 22 Table 4 12 LRDN Group Menu Functions
91. A 217B MA 235 1 MA 235 2 timing in port pin assignments The control port is a receive only RS 422 RS 485 serial port configured to accept an asynchronous 9600 bps data stream with these elements e One start bit e Eight data bits e No parity e One stop bit The control port recognizes four different information bytes Each of these four bytes consists of two identifying bits and six data bits Figure A 2 the 24 data bits contained in these four bytes are identical to the 24 bits in P02 P03 and P04 under ISiCL Section A 1 Delay P Codes The least significant right hand bit is transmitted first As when using P codes it is best to send the most significant bits first Byte Type 1 Byte Type 2 Byte Type 3 Byte Type 4 ID Configuration Data ID Configuration Data ID Configuration Data ID Configuration Data o o of of of of e of ofo o of e sf of 4 J of of 3 of of 33 4 4 4 of 3 of 4 4 ofelelofefel o o o eT ol 3 sTe sTo 3 Not used These 17 bits taken as a single binary number represent the buffer depth setting less 5 Change mode 0 Step mode Most Significant Least Significant 1 Smooth mode Bit MSB Bit LSB Figure A 2 RS 422 Control Port Information Bytes Harris Corporation A 5 Intraplex Products ee HARRIS Broadcast Communications Division Intraplex Products 5300 Kings Island Drive Ste 101 Mason OH 45040 phone 1 513 459 3
92. All configuration items in these groups can alternatively be configured using IntraGuide GUI software the SCM 1 SNMP proxy agent or Intraplex Command Language ISiCL commands In CM 5RB redundancy the backup common module controls the switching of the module and line Therefore most module and line redundancy configuration settings are performed on the backup module rather than the primary module The MRDN group is accessible only on the backup common module Also most LRDN group elements are available only on the backup CM 5RB module The exceptions are the FAIL and BER items these items can be programmed separately on both the primary and backup common modules allowing selection of different failure criteria for both primary and backup T1 lines To access the groups depress the group switch on the backup common module repeatedly until MRDN or LRDN appears Table 4 22 shows the MRDN group menu items and their parameters Table 4 23 shows the LRDN group menu items and their parameters Note Both the primary and backup common modules display the items shown in the FAIL and BER groups in Table 4 22 Harris Corporation 4 21 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 4 Setup amp Configuration Table 4 11 MRDN Group Menu Functions Group CNFG PRIM BACK LINE Item Off RVRT Factory default NRVT Exit N A N A Same Facto
93. August 2011 Determine Alert Alarm Status of Multiplexer You can determine the overall alarm and alert status of an ACS 160 Series multiplexer by issuing a STATUS command to its TERM or DI A module For example to determine the overall status of an ACS 163 terminal multiplexer issue a command of the form lt Address gt TERM STATUS The response to this command shows the status of the multiplexer s T1 interface and indicates whether any channel modules are in an alarm or alert state Similarly to determine the overall status of an ACS 165 drop and insert multiplexer issue a command of the form Address DI A STATUS The response to this command shows the status of the A direction T1 interface that is the T1 interface on the DI A module and indicates whether any channel modules are in an alarm or alert state To determine the T1 interface status on the DI B module in an ACS 165 drop and insert multiplexer issue a command of the form Address DI B STATUS The response to this command shows the status of the B direction T1 interface and indicates whether there is an alert or alarm condition in the shelf However since only the DI A module in a drop and insert multiplexer relays ISiCL commands to and from the channel modules in the shelf the response to a DI B STATUS command does not indicate which channel modules if any are generating an alarm If an ACS 160 Series multiplexer is not in an alarm or alert state
94. CM 5R TD module 1 4 3 Channel Modules There are one or more channel modules for Voice Data High fidelity audio Special applications Each channel module may terminate one or more payload circuits Section 2 1 6 Channel Modules 1 4 4 Module Adapters All common and channel modules require module adapters which insert directly behind each module and provide the circuit connector s Every channel module works with at least one type of module adapter and some channel modules are compatible with several module adapters each one providing a different type of connector or circuit interface Each CM 5RB common module is normally shipped with an MA 215 module adapter The MA 215 adapter can support module redundancy through the addition of a CA 412 cable and a second CM 5RB module Systems preconfigured for module and line redundancy for example the ACS 163R ACC system come equipped with two CM 5RB modules and one each MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 module adapters MA 215 and MA 235 module adapters provide RJ 48C T1 connections with CSU capabilities Systems without line redundancy can be equipped with DB 15 T1 connectors by using MA 217B module adapters 1 4 5 Power Supplies One power supply is always included and a second one may be added in 3RU shelf systems for power supply redundancy A redundant power supply cannot be installed in a 1RU shelf The standard power supply for the 1RU shelf is a 30 watt universal AC supply There sho
95. CM 5RB While the backup CM is transmitting the configuration settings the front panel display reads WAIT The transmission of the configuration settings can take up to two minutes for a full shelf of 18 channel modules When setting transmission is complete the WAIT display clears and the switchover is initiated switchover appears to be instantaneous 2 1 4 3 Module and Line Redundancy Module and line redundancy features are available with these common modules e CM 5RB module for T1 systems e CM 5RTD module for Time Delayed T1 systems Notes The CM 5R common module an earlier version of the CM 5RB module is the first generation CM to combine line and module redundancy The CM 5RB module should not be used in the same equipment shelf as the CM 5R module Any combination of the CM 5RB module in a single equipment shelf with older version common modules does not function properly that is a CM 5RB module cannot act as a backup for a CM 5R or vice versa To determine if a common module has combined module and line redundancy capability check the ejector tab It has one of these labels CM 5RB CM 5R or CM 5RTD 2 10 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 2 Functional Description ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 2 2 lists the common modules which the CM 5RB can replace Table 2 2 Interoperability Chart Application CM 5RB Repla
96. CONFIG STATUS WHO LOCK UNLOCK The first three commands can be addressed either to common modules or to channel modules When issued to a common module these commands must include an appropriate sub address TERM DI A or DI B When issued to channel modules they must include a sub address of the form Cn where is a number from 1 to 36 The last two commands refer to the remote port itself and therefore can be issued only to common modules If the command field is left blank the default command is STATUS This feature is convenient providing a quick method for checking the status of a multiplexer particularly a terminal multiplexer The colon terminating the field however must always be present As noted earlier if the address field is left blank any multiplexer responds and if the sub address field is left blank its default is TERM Combining these with the default for the command field means that a STATUS command can be issued to a terminal multiplexer simply by typing three colons and a semicolon Table 5 5 summarizes the five ISiCL commands Table 5 5 Command Field Entries Command Description SET Used to set a particular parameter on the common module or channel module identified in the sub address field Every SET command must include a valid parameter name and value in the parameter field Example 1 TERM SET CODE B8ZS CONFI G Lists the configuration settings for the module named in the sub
97. CS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 5 2 3 8 CONFIG Responses Channel Module Alarms The channel module alarm mask setting is reported in the SiCL CONFIG Response which is in this format CH ALM Active Subaddress Alarms Channel modules alarms are user maskable through ISiCL allowing you to configure the multiplexer so that only program audio channel modules can generate shelf alarms Check your channel module s documentation to determine if it supports alarm masking Table 5 18 gives the syntax for channel module alarm masking Note If a channel module is masked off and it fails it generates a shelf alert Table 5 18 I SICL Syntax for Channel Module Alarm Masking Legal Parameter Values Description CH ALM ALL Select alarms from the channel module sub addresses that are OR d onto the NONE shelf alarm 1 to 36 If ALL is entered all sub addresses reporting an alarm condition are totaled onto the shelf alarm using a logical OR function If NONE is entered no sub addresses reporting an alarm condition are totaled onto the shelf alarm using a logical OR function If a number 1 36 is entered that sub address is totaled onto the shelf alarm using a logical OR function Any subsequent sub address number is also be totaled using a logical OR function For example if the ISiCL commands SET CH ALM NONE SET CH ALM 1 SET CH ALM 2
98. ED ALERT LED VISIBLE WITH COVER ATTACHED gt POWER SUPPLY MODULE FAIL LED ALARM LED VISIBLE WITH COVER ATTACHED Figure 6 12 Y Series Power Supplies Front View 6 6 5 Alert and Alarm Troubleshooting If an alert or alarm condition is present the multiplexer takes these measures as appropriate e Turns off the NORMAL indicator light e Turns on the ALERT or ALARM indicator light e Activates the alert or alarm relays On an ACS 166 dual terminal multiplexer the multiplexer registers an alert or alarm if either of the terminals has an alert or alarm condition even if the other terminal is operating normally An alert or alarm condition on one terminal does not affect the operation of the other terminal 6 6 5 1 Alert Conditions One or more of these conditions cause an alert Yellow alarm RX IN indicator light blinks and RxYI appears in the BLNK group AIS alarm AIS indicator light on Any internal loopback active LPBK indicator light on Loss of primary timing fallback timing is activated and the timing indicator light corresponding to the currently selected primary timing mode is blinking Single power supply failure POWER FAIL indicator light is on e Alarm cut off ACO switch on e Alert at one or more channel modules module s alert indicator light is on or module is in alert state 6 6 5 2 Alarm Conditions One or more of these conditions cause an alarm e Failed CPU
99. ET NEXT switch To exit the SIO group press up and down on the GROUP switch 5 1 1 4 Baud Rate Setting To display and change the current remote port baud rate 1 Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until SIO appears 2 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch until the display reads BAUD 3 Press up once on the SET NEXT switch The display now reads 110 which is the first available baud rate 110 bits per second bps 4 Press down on the SET NEXT switch additional times to see the other available baud rates 300 1200 2400 and so on Note that the green top light turns on when the display shows the currently set baud rate and the red bottom light turns on when the display shows any other baud rate 5 To change the current baud rate press down on the SET NEXT switch until the display shows the desired baud rate and then press up twice on the SET NEXT switch After the first press the green top light blinks indicating that a change is about to be made After the second press the light turns on continuously indicating that the current baud rate now equals the displayed baud rate Harris Corporation 5 5 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 The last function in the BAUD subgroup is exit When the exit function is displayed you can press up on the SET NEXT switch to leave the BAUD subgroup and display PAR
100. Equipment Inspection cece cece ee eee eee ee teens 3 1 3 3 Multiplexer Shelf Installation sio rion or Ier tetas ee iod uro Cw e uuesdieetosatets 3 2 3 4 Redundant CM 5RB Modules irr er nter nave ERR em Te REUS 3 2 3 4 1 Redundant CM 5RB Installation esses 3 2 3 4 2 CM 5RB Combined Module and Line Redundancy Installation 3 3 3 5 Module Adapters uc d Poo duca ue vM eps das eode e din A PEE Eid 3 5 3 5 1 MA 215 and MA 217B Module Adapters ssssssssmm 3 6 3 5 2 MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 Module Adapters sssssssssme 3 7 2 6 WIRING GCPOWGE 52d cereo D brad esce ul ubt soit Diet and eden dvi Urin s 3 10 Harris Corporation i Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Table of Contents Version 2 11 August 2011 3 6 1 Channel Service Unit Connection cece eee eee eee mmn 3 12 3 6 2 ACS 160 Use with Integrated CSU ssssssssssssssmm mne enne 3 12 3 6 3 External Timing Connector Wiring Optional ssesseseeeen 3 15 3 6 4 Remote Port Wiring Optional sss 3 15 3 6 5 Power and Alarm Connection Wiring ssssseem e teeta teens 3 16 3 6 6 Avallable POWer ctt ed baad E Rr Laer RR OM ERREUR A ERR TAN TREAT urbane 3 19 3 6 7 Power Application ego eere eee i ea e RR ei RIP RR RE eR LER 3 20 3 7 Channel Module Installation 3 eee ere erre z
101. Group Timing Description INT Internal T1 transmitter of internally timed terminal multiplexer derives its timing from the multiplexer s own internal 1 544 oscillator EXT External T1 transmitter of externally timed terminal multiplexer derives its timing from external timing source connected to the external timing input pins on T1 I O connector Table 2 10 LOOP Loop T1 transmitter of loop timed terminal multiplexer derives its timing from received T1 signal that is the multiplexer s T1 output is synchronized to its T1 input SEND SEND appears in TI ME group display when the CM 5RB module is set to drop and insert mode but is not used Disregard this setting THRU Through Both CM 5RB modules in the ACS 165 drop and insert multiplexer derive their transmitter timing through T1 signal received by other module T1 output of DI A module is synchronized to T1 input of DI B module while T1 output of DI B module is synchronized to T1 input of DI A module Figures 3 6 and 3 7 THRU is the only available primary timing mode on the ACS 265 drop and insert multiplexers 4 4 1 Primary versus Fallback Timing The timing mode selected by the TI ME group setting is the primary timing mode ACS 160 Series multiplexers also have a fallback timing mode The factory setting for fallback timing is internal When configured for external loop or through timing if the primary timing source becomes unavailable the CM 5RB module performs an automatic
102. HARRIS Intraplex ACS 160 amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Manual ACS 163 Terminal Access Server 3RU ACS 165 Drop amp Insert Access Server 3RU ACS 166 Dual Terminal Access Server 3RU ACS 167 Terminal Access Server 1RU ACS 168 Drop amp Insert Access Server 1RU ACS 169 Dual Terminal Access Server 1RU STL 163 Studio to Transmitter Link 3RU STL 165 Studio to Transmitter Link 3RU STL 166 Studio to Transmitter Link 3RU CM 5RB Common Module CM 5R TD Time Delay Common Module Version 2 11 Intraplex T1 Multiplexer Installation and Operation Manual Version 2 11 August 2011 Copyright 2000 2010 and 2011 Harris Corporation All rights reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Harris makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Harris shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damage in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Trademark Credits Harris AudioLink PLUS HD Link IntraGuide Intraplex NetXpress NetXpress LX STL PLUS SynchroCast and SynchroCast3
103. IT ERROR RATE 5 26 Meaning One of the two power supplies on the main shelf or if so equipped one of the two power supplies on the expansion shelf has failed The channel module with card address nn nn O1 to 36 is in an alarm state This message appears when there is an alarm at one and only one channel module Reported by a TERM or DI A module only There are n channel modules in an alarm state This message appears when there are at least two channel modules in an alarm state Issue STATUS commands to specific channel modules to determine exactly which modules are in trouble Section 5 2 3 5 Channel Module Status Reported by a TERM or DI A module only The channel module with card address nn nn 01 to 36 is in an alert state This message appears when there is an alert at one and only one channel module Reported by a TERM or DI A module only There are n channel modules in an alert state This message appears when there are at least two channel modules in an alert state Issue STATUS commands to specific channel modules to determine exactly which modules are in trouble Section 5 2 3 5 Channel Module Status Reported by a TERM or DI A module only The T1 transmitter is using its fallback internal timing mode The T1 transmitter has dropped out of its primary timing mode but for some reason cannot operate in its fallback timing mode The T1 transmitter is not generating an output signal No signal i
104. NO COM NC NO COM NC le leleljelelele e STATION GROUND Signal Battery for E amp M Type II and III FORI POW m To AC power source MADE IN U S A External fuse 1A slow blow Station Ground Signal Battery for E amp M Type II and III To AC power source Figure 3 18 Connection for AC Operation of 1RU System with External Signal Battery n place of a separate signal battery you can use a 48V DC power source with a parallel connection from BAT A to the SIG BAT input and BAT to GND 3 6 5 1 Dual AC Feeds All 3RU multiplexers can be equipped with an ACS OPT1 option providing separate AC power feeds for each power supply When the ACS OPT1 option is in place the rear panel looks like Figure 3 19 For maximum redundancy connect the two power cords to two different AC power sources SIG BAT BAT BAT R R BAT BAT e e ALARMS ALERT ALARM NO COM NC NO COM NC 110 VOLTS AC 50 60 HZ 1AMP Figure 3 19 3RU Multiplexer Rear Panel with ACS OPT1 Dual AC Power Feed Option 3 18 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 3 Installation amp Wiring ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 3 6 5 2 Power and Alarm Connection Procedure Use this procedure to make connections for power and alarms Each step in this procedure gives the connection for a 3RU shelf and then the equivalent connection for a
105. OPBACK ON USING LOOP TIMING FOR PAYLOAD LOOPBACK LINE LB ON LINE LOOPBACK ON EQPT LB ON EQUIPMENT LOOPBACK ON Harris Corporation 5 27 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 Change Common Module Setup Parameters You can change the CM 5RB setup by issuing SET commands with the appropriate parameter names and values Table 5 8 lists the CM 5RB setup parameters you can change remotely For example to set line code to AMI in an ACS 163 terminal multiplexer with an address of 11 issue this command 11 TERM SET CODE AMI Table 5 8 Parameter Names and Values for CM 5RB SET Commands Parameter Function FRAMI NG T1 framing format CODE T1 line code PTIME Primary timing mode LI NE LB T1 line loopback PAYLD LB T1 payload loopback EQPT LB T1 equipment loopback Values ESF SF B8ZS AMI INT EXT LOOP THRU ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Sets Parameter To Extended superframe Superframe Also known as D4 Bipolar with 8 zero substitution Alternate mark inversion Internal terminal multiplexers only External terminal multiplexers only Loop terminal multiplexers only Through drop and insert multiplexers only Activate the line loopback Deactivate the line loopback Activate the payload loopback Deactivate the payload loopback Activate the equipment
106. OUT T1 IN TIMING Figure 6 1 CM 5RB Module Front View Note Because CM 5RB modules install vertically in 3RU multiplexers up and down on the toggle switches actually refer to your right and left respectively in an ACS 163 ACS 165 or ACS 166 unit Figure 6 2 Figure 6 2 GROUP and SET NEXT Switches in 3RU Shelf The power supply has four additional system status lights which are visible when the front cover of the shelf is closed Figure 6 3 Table 6 1 summarizes the light indications for both the CM 5RB module and the power supply Section 2 1 3 7 CM 5RB User Interface gives more detailed CM 5RB functional descriptions and Section 2 1 5 Power Supply Modules gives more details on power supplies 6 2 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 POWER LED VISIBLE WITH COVER ATTACHED NORMAL LED VISIBLE WITH COVER ATTACHED ALERT LED VISIBLE WITH COVER ATTACHED POWER SUPPLY MODULE FAIL LED gt ALARM LED VISIBLE WITH COVER ATTACHED Figure 6 3 Y Series Power Supply Front View Table 6 1 Status I ndicator Light Summary Light Category Location T1 Status CM 5RB module Timing CM 5RB module System status CM 5RB module System status power supply Label Color TX OUT green RX IN green
107. Only the MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 module adapters are qualified to use with both line and module redundancy MA 215 or MA 217A B adapters can be used with the CM 5RB module for module only redundancy Installing the MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 adapters initially gives you the ability to upgrade to line redundancy at a later date Section 4 2 gives more information on module and line redundancy 3 6 1 Channel Service Unit Connection If your multiplexer is connected to a T1 line leased from a telephone company a channel service unit CSU is required at each end of the circuit The T1 output of the multiplexer connects to the CSU which converts it into the appropriate format for transmission to the telephone company central office The ACS 160 Series multiplexer with the CM 5RB common module and the MA 215 MA 235 1 or MA 235 2 module adapter has an ANSI T1 403 and AT amp T TR54016 compliant CSU built in This feature eliminates the need for an external CSU and allows you to connect a T1 directly to your multiplexer Section 3 6 2 gives more information on CSU configuration 3 6 2 ACS 160 Use with I ntegrated CSU Connect your T1 line to the MA 215 MA 235 1 or MA 235 2 module adapter on the ACS 160 Series multiplexer using an RJ 48C connector The module adapter is properly configured at the factory and no change is necessary for connection to a T1 line Figure 3 12 shows the Pin 1 and 8 orientation for the MA 215 MA 235 1 or MA 235 2 module adapters
108. RS 485 remote port termination e External timing input impedance e Optional delay input impedance The positions of the SW1 DIP switches Figure 3 7 control the functions Table 3 3 lists the switches and their functions Table 3 3 MA 215 MA 217B SW1 Switches and Functions Factory Switch Default Description 1 and2 On These two switches control the RS 485 bias of the remote port used for remote ports in daisy chain configuration These switches normally should be in the On bias position When daisy chaining one module adapter in the chain should have these switches on and the others should be off 3 On This switch controls the termination impedance 120 ohms for the RS 485 portion of the remote port This switch should normally be in the On position When daisy chaining the last multiplexer in the chain should have this switch on and the others should be off 4 On This switch controls the external timing input impedance 120 ohms TIMING IN port This switch is normally set to on When daisy chaining the last multiplexer in the chain should have this switch On and the others should be off 5 On This switch controls the input impedance 120 ohms when using the optional time delay capability It is normally set to On 6 On Not used 3 5 2 MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 Module Adapters An external shielded cable connects the MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 module adapter pair The adapters operate in line redundancy with a pair of CM 5RB mo
109. SLV BRDG 8 KB 16 KB default 32 KB 64 KB 1to24 Description Serial input and output settings Section 5 1 1 3 Configuration Remote Port Parameters SIO Group Setting RED not selected GREEN selected Sets baud rate to 110 bps Sets baud rate to 300 bps Sets baud rate to 1200 bps Sets baud rate to 2400 bps Sets baud rate to 4800 bps Sets baud rate to 9600 bps Sets baud rate to 19 2 kbps Sets baud rate to 57 6 kbps Sets parity to space Sets parity to mark Sets parity to even Sets parity to odd Exit PAR and display Lock Locks and unlocks the serial port Network communications parameters Section 5 1 2 DSO Management Communications Turn network communications off Sets the multiplexer to master mode Sets the multiplexer to subordinate mode Sets the multiplexer to bridge mode Sets the data rate to 8 Kbps 1 bit DSO Sets the data rate to 16 Kbps 2 bit DSO Sets the data rate to 32 Kbps 4 bit DSO Sets the data rate to 64 Kbps 8 bit DSO Time slot for T1 DSO time slot 24 is the default Common module redundancy settings Only seen on redundant CM 5RB common modules Section 4 6 Redundant CM 5RB REDN Group Never switch to a backup On power up the 4 character display on the front panel indicates the multiplexing mode on the primary CM 5RB module Table 4 2 If a backup CM 5RB module is installed it always reads BKUP during power up Harris Corporation Intr
110. Site A Site C Version 2 11 August 2011 ACS 163 Terminal Multiplexer Program Receive 7 5 kHz mono receiver ACS 165 Drop and Insert Multiplexer Program Transmit Public Network 15 kHz stereo Figure 5 17 Change Channel Module Configuration by Remote Control Assume here that the password for the multiplexer is BLUE Remember that all remote communication with channel modules on a drop and insert shelf is through the DI A CM 5RB module To unlock the remote port type 7 DI A UNLOCK BLUE P Gl The multiplexer responds OK To make the necessary changes type 7 C4 SET SRVC OFF To verify the configuration of the channel module type 7 C4 CONFIG Table 5 16 shows the system response Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 37 ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 5 16 Explanation of CONFI G Response for Example 2 Response Meaning OK A valid query was received CHANNEL CARD 4 TYPE 202 The module in slot 4 is a PT 153 module UNDER REMOTE CONTROL Set to remote control SRVC OFF The module s output is disabled P01 11 B00001011 First left channel time slot is set to 11 P02 12 B00001100 Second left channel time slot is set to 12 P03 13 B00001101 First right channel time slot is set to 13 P04 14 B00001110 Second
111. T switch 4 To exit the Lock function and display the BAUD subgroup press down on the SET NEXT switch To exit the SIO group entirely press up or down on the GROUP switch 5 6 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 5 1 2 DSO Management Communications You can remotely access Intraplex network access products using the internal DSO management communications capability DSO management communications enable the multiplexer using its common module to pass management commands to the CM 5RB module connected at the far end of the T1 line communicating over an adjustable payload bandwidth in a DSO time slot of the T1 line DSO management communications allow access to multiple Intraplex multiplexers from a single gateway point You must properly configure the COMM DSO communications group on the CM 5RB module for DSO management communications You can access the COMM group through the common module basic configuration menu Section 4 2 2 Display and Change Items in Basic Configuration Group gives detailed explanations on displaying and editing functions in the CM 5RB basic menu Table 5 3 shows descriptions of the COMM group settings Table 5 3 DSO Management Communication Settings Abridged Basic Configuration Menu COMM DSO management communications parameters CNFG DSO configuration OFF Turn DSO communications
112. TAT Queries remote CSU line performance in ANSI T1 403 1995 compliant format ATT STAT Queries a summary of the ATT TR54016 performance registers REGISTERS Queries a detailed history of the ATT TR54016 performance registers 5 40 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 REMOTE STAT command requests line performance statistics for data sent from the local to remote multiplexer Remote multiplexer must be ANSI compliant Local Remote ACS 160 Series ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series Multiplexer Tx Rx STL 160 Series Multiplexer Integrated CM 5RB eN or External Rx Tx CSU CSU STAT ATT STAT and REGISTERS commands request line performance statistics for data sent from the remote to local multiplexer Figure 5 18 Relationship of CSU Line Performan Data Commands to Local amp Remote Multiplexers The next sections outline e Each command s syntax Response format Guidelines for evaluating the response data Issue CSU STAT Command You can query the CSU line performance statistics of an ACS 160 Series multiplexer by issuing a CSU STAT command to its TERM DI A or DI B module Table 5 20 gives examples of CSU STAT commands for ACS 160 Series multiplexers Table 5 20 CSU STAT Commands Model Command ACS 163 Terminal lt ADDRESS gt TERM CSU_STAT
113. Testing and Troubleshooting gives information on diagnostic functions including the use of T1 loopbacks 4 1 Customer Service Unit CSU Use A CSU is required at each end of the circuit for equipment to be connected to a T1 line leased from a telephone company MA 215 MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 module adapters have a CSU provided however other module adapters require an external CSU The T1 output of the multiplexer connects to the CSU which converts it into the appropriate format for transmission to the telephone company central office The CSU may also perform additional features such as error logging Consult your CSU manual for setup instructions and information on the features it provides The T1 line code and frame format settings selected for the multiplexer must match those on the CSU Section 4 5 T1 Frame Format and Line Code TSEL Group describes how to set these functions 4 2 CM 5RB Basic Configuration Group Menu Figure 4 1 shows the user interface by which you can determine and change the basic configuration of the CM 5RB module The basic configuration provides most of the settings you need to make on the CM 5RB module Figure 4 2 shows the flow of the basic configuration group menu and Table 4 1 supplements that information with a complete description of each group NETWK MON EQUIP MON GROUP FUNCTION ON SET b Z amp z OFF NEXT x d uu T1 OUT T1 IN Figure 4 1 CM 5RB User I nterface Horizontal View Harris Cor
114. VAIL SECS UAS BUR ERRD SECS BES SEV ERRD SECS SES CTL SLIP SECS CSS LOSS OF FRAME Description Measured Seconds The number of seconds the integrated CSU has been accumulating CSU line performance statistics in the current 15 minute interval This register can hold a maximum value of 900 60 seconds per minute x 15 minutes 900 seconds Valid Intervals The number of complete 15 minute intervals that the integrated CSU has accumulated CSU line performance data This register can hold a maximum value of 96 four 15 minute intervals per hour x 24 hours 96 intervals Errored seconds A second with one or more ESF error events that is one or more CRC6 error events or one or more OOFs out of frame Unavailable seconds A count of one second intervals during which service is unavailable Bursty errored seconds A second with more than one but less than 320 CRC6 error events Severely errored second A second with 320 or more CRC6 error events OR one or more OOFs Controlled slips seconds The occurrence of a replication or deletion of a DS1 frame at the receiving terminal A controlled slip may occur when there is a difference between the timing of a synchronous receiving terminal and the received signal Loss of frame The occurrence of a DS1 terminal unable Version 2 11 August 2011 LOF 0 0 Typical Values Under normal operating conditions when the device is ANSI or AT amp T compli
115. Yellow alarm seconds Signal transmitted if a DS1 terminal is unable to synchronize on the DS1 signal for some interval of time indicating an LOF loss of frame condition Commonly referred to as yellow signal also known as a remote alarm indication RAI Clear CSU STAT and REMOTE STAT Data Each CSU STAT and REMOTE STAT register can hold from 0 to 65535 events When a register reaches 65535 events it remains at that number until cleared to 0 with a CLEAR command For example to clear an ACS 163 multiplexer s CSU STAT and REMOTE STAT registers issue a command in this form lt ADDRESS gt T ERM CLEAR Typical Value Under normal operating conditions you should not have any BPV seconds Under normal operating conditions you should never have any SLIP errors Under normal operating conditions you should not have any payload loopback seconds Under normal operating conditions you should not have any yellow alarm seconds The CLEAR command clears both the CSU_STAT and REMOTE_STAT registers You cannot clear individual data registers Issue ATT_STAT Command You can query a summary of the ACS 160 Series multiplexer s AT amp T TR54016 performance registers by issuing a ATT_STAT command to its TERM DI A or DI B module Table 5 23 shows examples of ATT _STAT commands for ACS 160 Series multiplexers Table 5 23 ATT_ Model ACS 163 Terminal STAT Command Command l
116. address field The parameter field in a CONFIG command should be left blank Example 9999 DI A CONFIG STATUS When addressed to a channel module lists the state of all S status parameters associated with that module Example 1234 C5 STATUS When addressed to a CM 5RB module lists the T1 interface and timing status information associated with that module Also provides notification if one or more channel modules are in an alert or alarm state Example 1234 TERM STATUS In all cases the STATUS command s parameter field should be left blank WHO Provides the information for network shelf addresses configuration TERM DI A or DI B and the local shelf modules The response to the WHO command appears as OK CM 5RB CONFIGURED AS A TERM CHANNEL CARD n1 TYPE idl CHANNEL CARD n2 TYPE lt id2 gt CHANNEL CARD n3 TYPE lt id3 gt Where n card address and id card type identifier Harris Corporation 5 21 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 5 5 Command Field Entries continued Command Description UNLOCK Unlocks the remote port of the addressed CM 5RB module This command must be accompanied by a valid password in the parameter field However because every CM 5RB module is given a null password at the factory the parameter field of UNLOCK c
117. affecting their levels 6 5 2 T1 Test Equipment Use with In Service Tests 6 5 2 1 In service Monitoring Procedure When intermittent errors occur on one or more data channels it is often helpful to perform in service monitoring on the T1 facility This monitoring primarily helps determine whether the channel errors are caused by errors on the T1 facility rather than by a fault in the channel module or in another section of the low speed circuit Use this procedure to perform in service monitoring of a T1 facility between two ACS 160 locations Figure 6 6 which does not affect any of the channel traffic between these locations 1 To measure performance in the Location 2 to Location 1 direction connect the DS1 T1 input of a T1 test set to the T1 IN MON jack on the multiplexer at Location 1 2 To measure performance in the Location 1 to Location 2 direction connect the DS1 T1 input of a T1 test set to the T1 IN MON jack on the multiplexer at Location 2 Location 1 Location 2 Voice Voice data ACS 160 series data and multiplexer and pogram ACS 160 series program audio circuits audio multiplexer ed circuits Monitoring the Location 2 to Location 1 Monitoring the Location 1 to Location 2 direction of transmission direction of transmission Figure 6 6 T1 Circuit In Service Monitoring 6 5 2 2 Test Result Interpretation Guidelines e On T1 systems using the ESF frame format measure total CRC 6 errors CRC 6 errored sec
118. ailure condition is cleared NRVT Non revertive switching Switches to backup when failure is detected in primary but does not switch back Exit Exit CNFG sub menu SWCH Switching sub menu Displays backup or primary switch status If SET NEXT indicator light is green top backup CM 5RB module is active If light is red bottom primary CM 5RB module is active This switch can also be used to manually toggle from the backup to primary CM 5RB module or from the primary to backup CM 5RB module LOF ON Loss of frame Switch to backup if primary receives loss of frame condition OFF Deactivates the LOF switching LOS ON Loss of signal Switch to backup if primary is receives loss of signal condition OFF Deactivates the LOS switching YEL ON Yellow alarm Switch to the backup if the primary receives a yellow alarm OFF Deactivates the YEL switching AIS ON Alarm indication signal Switch to the backup if the primary is receiving an AIS signal OFF Deactivates the AIS switching ndicates factory default Warning The primary and backup CM 5RB modules must be identically configured on their user interfaces The backup CM 5RB module cannot automatically learn and configure itself to the primary CM 5RB configuration Section 1 5 1 Function Groups and Configuration Switches gives CM 5RB basic menu functions 4 7 Optional Integrated CM 5RTD Time Delay TDLY Group The TD 1 T1 Delay Module is now fully integrated into the CM 5RTD
119. always takes this general form en OK CHANNEL CARD nn TYPE mmm one or two lines indicating Alert Alarm conditions if present followed by one or more lines stating the values of each S status parameter Table 5 10 shows a response to a STATUS command sent to a PT 150A program audio transmitter Table 5 10 Typical STATUS Response and Meaning Response Meaning OK A valid command was received CHANNEL CARD 3 TYPE 194 Channel module 3 is a PT 150A module S01 1 B00000001 The left channel analog input is active S02 0 B00000000 The right channel analog input is idle S03 0 B00000000 The left channel input is not in overload S04 0 B00000000 The right channel input is not in overload The channel module type located in the second line of the response is a number assigned by Intraplex to each different type generally each different model of remotely controllable channel module The individual channel module manuals contain the type number and definitions for the S status parameters maintained by each type of channel module 5 2 3 6 Line Module Redundancy STATUS Messages The STATUS message response is lt CRS OK Harris Corporation 5 31 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 SHI MODULE LINE RE MA ST L1 UA D lt lt
120. am channels bit error tests on data channels and so on Remove the loopback of the DI B CM 5RB module by removing the patch cord or deactivating the equipment loopback At this point you can perform end to end tests on channels established between any two locations that have already been tested The individual channel module manuals give recommended test procedures 6 12 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 6 8 Indicator Lights in Drop and Insert Loopback or DI B CM 5RB Test Patch Cord EqLB Indicator Loopback Loopback TX OUT ON ON Equip T1 OUT jacks ies RX IN ON z uU E ERR OFF OFF quip 3 j Uo T1 IN jack nae 9 veL OFF OFF GROUP switch m BPV OFF OFF AS OFF OFF Function display FRM OFF OFF ON OFF a LOOP ON ON SET NEXT switch 3 TX OUT cs INT ON ON R RR LPBK OFF ON m O DI B Timing eoor only EXT LPBK CPU OFF OFF CPU CM 5RB Module 3 NORMAL ON OFF v 22 ALERT OFF ON 5 v ALARM OFF OFF The RX IN indicator light on the DI A CM 5RB module should be on However when the internal equipment loopback is active the RX IN state of the DI B CM 5RB module depends on the signal coming from Location 3 which has not yet been tested 6 5 Test Equipment Use with T1 Multiplexer System You can perform ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series system tests at th
121. and a signal is present DETEC TIME remains constant at 0 00 Under normal operating conditions you should not have any CRC errors The more CRC errors accumulated the greater the severity of the problem CRC gt 320 is equivalent to a severely errored second Under normal operating conditions you should not have any SEFE seconds Under normal operating conditions you should not have any FBE seconds Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 5 22 CSU STAT and REMOTE STAT Response Data continued Data BPV SEC SLIP SEC PLB SEC YEL SEC Description Bipolar violation seconds A non zero signal element in an AMI bipolar signal that has the same polarity as the previous non zero signal element Section 6 2 ACS 160 Series Monitor amp Control Features gives more information on bipolar violations Controlled slips seconds The occurrence of a replication or deletion of a DS1 frame at the receiving terminal A controlled slip may occur when there is a difference between the timing of a synchronous receiving terminal and the received signal Payload loopback seconds A loopback which results in a 1 536 Mbps loopback of the payload of the signal received by the customer installation from the network installation maintaining bit sequence integrity for the information bits
122. and fallback timing 2 1 4 13 T1 Loopbacks T1 Line Loopback can be used on either the active or backup line at any time Equipment Loopback can only be activated on the active module If Equipment Loopback is active at the time the module is switched inactive it is automatically turned off and hidden from view on the front panel display Section 6 3 1 T1 Loopback Use Harris Corporation 2 17 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 2 Functional Description Version 2 11 August 2011 2 1 5 Power Supply Modules The standard 1RU ACS 160 Series power supply is a 30 watt universal AC supply while the standard 3RU ACS 160 Series or STL 160 Series power supply is a 60 watt universal AC supply DC power supplies for 3RU shelves are also available with input voltages of 48 VDC and 24 VDC An optional 95 watt universal AC supply is available for the 3RU shelf for applications with high power requirements Section 7 Specifications gives details on all available power supplies Follow the Section 3 3 Multiplexer Installation guidelines about shelf spacing to avoid heat problems Note The ACS 160 Series and STL 160 Series multiplexers allow for the combined use of AC and DC power supply operation at the same time A second power supply may be inserted in the second power supply slot for power supply redundancy If the main supply fails the second supply ensures uninterrupted
123. ant measured seconds should be between 0 and 900 Under normal operating conditions you should see a value between 0 and 96 Under normal operating conditions you should not have any errored seconds Under normal operating conditions you should not have any unavailable seconds Under normal operating conditions you should not have any BES seconds Under normal operating conditions you should not have any SEFE seconds Under normal operating conditions you should never have any SLIP errors Under normal operating LOF to synchronize on the DS1 signal for some interval conditions you should not have any loss of frame in a 24 hour period Note There are no commands available to clear the ATT STAT and REGISTERS registers Appendix A gives details on using ISiCL to configure the CM 5RTD common module s delay feature Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 45 This page is left blank intentionally 5 46 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products Section 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting This section describes the testing and troubleshooting procedures for the ACS 160 Series multiplexers and provides an overview of the procedures used for testing payload channels The section discusses using e ACS 160 Series switches and indicators e T1 loopbacks e T1 test equipment e Channel test equipment for in service and out of service testing Test procedures for individual channel modules are l
124. aplex Products 4 5 ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 4 Setup amp Configuration Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 4 2 Primary CM 5RB Initial Display Front Panel Display Indicated Mode TERM Terminal multiplexers DI A DI A in a drop insert multiplexer DI B DI B in a drop insert multiplexer SPAR Spare Note These procedures include use of the GROUP and SET NEXT switches If you are not already familiar with using these switches please review Section 1 5 CM 5RB User Interface before proceeding 4 2 1 Access Configuration Group Use these steps to access the configuration group 1 Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display reads TIME 2 Release the switch You are now in the Configuration Group Figure 4 1 shows the switch and indicator locations 4 2 2 Display and Change Items in Basic Configuration Group 1 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch until the display shows the menu you want to change 2 Note that some items are underscored indicating an additional subgroup Complete the next two steps to enter and cycle through any subgroups Press up once on the SET NEXT switch to display the first of the subgroup options 4 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch to cycle through other subgroup options Press up twice on the SET NEXT switch After the first press the green top light blinks indicating a change is about to be made After
125. arris Corporation Intraplex Products 7 5 7 6 This page is left blank intentionally Harris Corporation Intraplex Products Appendix A ISICL CM 5RTD Delay Configuration The configuration and status monitoring of the optional delay feature are controlled by ISiCL through the remote control interface The delay feature parameters are controlled using P parameter codes the status is retrieved using S status codes These features correspond to the manual switch settings discussed in the TDLY section of Table 4 1 and the procedures in Section 4 7 1 2 CM 5RTD Sub address For example to set smooth hitless buffer depth change on a CM 5RTD module whose delay feature has an address of 2 and with a multiplexer address of 11 issue this command 11 C2 SET P02 B00000000 You can turn service on or off for the delay feature by sending SRVC ON or SRVC OFF in the ISiCL parameter field with a SET command A 1 Delay P Codes P codes allow you to set parameters on the CM 5RTD delay feature when used in the parameter field of an ISiCL SET command There are four P codes for the CM 5RTD delay feature e PO1 e P02 e P03 e P04 Each is a number from 0 to 255 also represented as an eight digit binary number in parentheses Table A 1 describes the meanings of the P codes P codes also appear in the response to a CONFIG query showing the current parameter settings on the card OK CHANNEL CARD
126. cable please contact Intraplex Customer Service for a recommendation e Cables for each payload channel RS 232 RS 449 and or V 35 for data channels between the multiplexer and DTE equipment 22 24 gauge wire for program audio channels and RJ 11 or 50 pin telco for voice Note All payload channels connect to the multiplexer via module adapters that plug in at the rear of the shelf The individual channel module manuals provide detailed descriptions of the module adapter s and cable requirements for the modules shipped with the system e For DC powered shelf 16 18 gauge wire for power connection an AC power cable is included if the shelf is AC powered e Optional one unshielded cable for each remote port if you wish to use the remote access and control feature Section 2 6 4 For each module adapter the multiplexer end of the cable requires an RJ 11 connector e Optional timing cable if external timing input or output is required Section 3 6 3 e Optional volt ohm meter VOM 3 2 T1 Multiplexer Equipment I nspection Upon receiving the equipment complete these tasks 1 Inspect all shipping cartons for damage 2 If damage is observed notify the shipper as soon as possible 3 Unpack all equipment from containers 4 Inspect equipment for damage 5 Verify that the multiplexers are equipped as expected confirming items from the packing list Bill of Materials If you have any questions regarding possible equipm
127. can be presented in either of two industry formats ANSI T1 403 1995 or AT amp T TR54016 The integrated CSU s factory default standard is ANSI Use the Configuration Group to select the integrated CSU s standard 1 Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display reads TSEL 2 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch until the display reads CSU Notice that CSU is underscored indicating an additional subgroup Press up once on the SET NEXT switch to display Off the first of three CSU options 4 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch until the display shows the standard you want to select 5 To change modes press up twice on the SET NEXT switch After the first press the green top light blinks indicating that a change is about to be made After the second press it turns on continuously indicating that the integrated CSU is now operating in the standard you selected CSU Line Performance Statistics Access and Evaluation You can determine the performance status of an ACS 160 Series or STL 160 Series multiplexer by issuing one of the four ISiCL commands to its TERM DI A or DI B module Table 5 19 describes the four commands Figure 5 18 shows the relationship of the CSU line performance data commands to local and remote multiplexers Table 5 19 Summary of I SiCL Commands for CSU Line Performance Data Command Meaning CSU STAT Queries local CSU line performance in ANSI T1 403 1995 compliant format REMOTE S
128. cation 1 and sequentially activating these two different loopbacks at Location 2 e Line loopback in the ACS 160 multiplexer to test the both the facility and the connections between the CSU and the multiplexer e Payload loopback in the ACS 160 multiplexer to test the facility the connections and the CM 5RB module in the location 2 multiplexer Location 1 Location 2 T1 TEST SET IN ACS 160 Series Multiplexer T1 Circuit Voice data and program audio circuits Payload Loopback Line Loopback Figure 6 7 T1 Circuit Out of Service Testing 6 5 4 Analog or Data Test Equipment Use with Channel Tests This section provides general principles for testing individual payload channels Each specific channel module manuals give channel test procedures for that module Test individual channels using the appropriate analog transmission measurement sets TMS digital bit error rate test sets BERTS and other related types of test equipment You can perform tests on individual channels of in service T1 systems without affecting the other channels carried in the same system Figure 6 8 shows a typical end to end data channel test If the data channel module at location 2 has an internal loopback capability activate that loopback to perform the test If it does not use a loopback plug connected to the module adapter for that module Harris Corporation 6 15 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux
129. cations 1 and 2 the transmit time slot at Location 1 must be the same as the receive time slot at Location 2 and the transmit time slot at Location 2 must be the same as the receive time slot at Location 1 e When adding a pair of one way modules to transmit from Point A to Point B and a similar pair to transmit from Point B to Point A use the same time slot in both directions of transmission if possible This is not a requirement but should reduce the chance of making record keeping errors e Always select time slots that are not occupied by other channels in any T1 facility traversed by the new channel In drop and insert systems with four or more locations be careful not to ignore time slots occupied by channels between intermediate drop and insert multiplexers 3 7 3 Channel Module I nstallation Procedure 1 At Location 1 install and wire the module adapter that is provided with the channel module Figure 3 20 Modules common channel Module power etc Main or expansion shelf adapters X Front Rear Eject Tab Backplane Connector s Standard for specific Power supply modules do not connector interface require module adapters to mate in backplane Figure 3 20 3RU Side View or 1RU Top View with Module and Adapter I nsertions 2 Install the channel module at Location 1 Warning f the ALARM or ALERT indicator light on the power supply turns on remove the channel module immediately Harris Co
130. ceable CM 5 TERM Yes CM 5 DI Yes replace both DI A and DI B CM 5 TERM Module Redundant Yes replace both primary and backup CM 5 DI Module Redundant Yes replace all 4 CMs CM 5R Yes replace both In order to use combined module and line redundancy these components must be installed in a chassis in adjacent module slots Two common modules a pair of CM 5RB modules One MA 235 1 module adapter with RJ 48C connector One MA 235 2 module adapter with RJ 48C connector One CA 202 shielded cable that connects the two module adapters Note The MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 module adapters are the only adapters qualified to use with both line and module redundancy MA 215 or MA 217A B adapters can be used with the CM 5RB module for module only redundancy You should install the MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 adapters as they have the capability to upgrade to line redundancy at a later date Figure 2 8 shows a component level diagram of the system channel Primary T1 Line dul Dich CM 5RB primary MA 235 1 common module module adapter CA 202 channel mo dule Backup T1 Line ooo channel mo dule Figure 2 8 Combined Module and Line Redundancy Block Diagram The MA 235 1 module adapter provides the T1 interface for the primary line and the port is labeled T1 E1 Primary The MA 235 2 module adapter provides the T1 connection for the backup line through the port labeled T1 E1 Backup Both module adapters work as a pair but
131. ceiver jitter buffer depth has been exceeded The default buffer depth is 32 UI peak to peak 1 Ul 648 nS so 32 UI 20 7 microseconds ON If the top green light is on the jitter buffer depth is exceeded jitter gt 32 UI peak to OFF Eu peak assuming a factory default buffer depth ON If the bottom red light is on the jitter buffer depth is not exceeded jitter lt 32 UI OFF Bag peak to peak assuming a factory default buffer depth To view the contents of the RVU1 group perform these steps 1 Press up or down on the GROUP switch until the display reads RVU1 2 Press down on the SET NEXT switch repeatedly to cycle through its contents 3 To leave the RVU1 group press up or down on the GROUP switch 6 6 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 6 3 4 Other Diagnostic Data DI AG Group The DIAG diagnostic group displays some basic T1 common module information and enables a reset to factory default settings Table 6 5 Table 6 5 DI AG Group Function Description T1 Indicates the module s multiplexing mode which is always T1 in an ACS 160 Series multiplexer 3 3 Indicates the module s firmware version Fcty Factory reset Set this function by pushing up twice on the SET NEXT switch while Fcty is displayed to return the module to its factory default configuration Framing ESF Line
132. cess jitter on T1 has been detected Transmit phase loop lock status Section 6 3 3 Performance Data Review RVU1 Group RED unlocked GREEN locked Receive phase loop lock status RED unlocked GREEN locked Transmit receive clock lock RED unlocked GREEN locked Jitter buffer status RED OK GREEN Buffer exceeded Channel service unit CSU displays when the CM 5RB module is connected to the MA 215 MA 235 1 MA 235 2 or T1 displays when the CM 5RB module is connected to the MA 217B Section 6 3 4 Other Diagnostic Data DIAG Group Current version of the loaded firmware Status of settings RED Not factory setting GREEN Factory settings Multiplexer address number 0000 to 9999 Section 5 1 1 2 Configuration Network Address ADDR Group Setting Time delay control for units with optional delay capability CM 5RTD module Section 4 7 Optional Integrated CM 5RTD Time Delay TDLY Group Time delay subaddress 1 36 Local control RED local control off GREEN local control on Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 4 Setup amp Configuration ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 4 1 CM 5RB Basic Configuration Group continued Group Selections SIO BAUD PAR LOCK COMM CNFG RATE TSLT REDN MRDN LRDN 110 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2 57 6 Spac Mark Even Odd exit OFF Default MSTR
133. cut off switch ACO active Loss of receive signal Receiving yellow alarm Loss of primary timing fallback timing active Form C one normally open and one normally closed contact Form C one normally open and one normally closed contact 100 Volts 100 mA 10 VA 3RU shelves Terminal strip on rear panel 1RU shelves DB 15S on rear panel Standard and enhanced performance parameters stored in 15 minute intervals over the most recent 24 hours Performance parameters reported over T1 Facility Data Link in response to network request messages RS 232 interface allows interrogation of all data bins or can obtain a summary report Generates Performance Report Message PRM every second over the T1 Facility Data Link RS 232 interface can accumulate and interrogate incoming and outgoing PRM data Physical slots and T1 time slots are unrelated channel modules may be assigned to any available 64 kbps time slot s ACS 163 17 channel modules ACS 165 16 channel modules ACS 166 8 channel modules for each terminal ACS 167 5 channel modules ACS 168 4 channel modules ACS 169 2 channel modules for each terminal 7 3 ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 7 Specifications Version 2 11 August 2011 Connector Consumption Power Supply Modules for Three Rack Unit 3RU Shelf PSY60AC standard on PSY5024 o a PSY5048 PSY100AC Power Supply Modules for One Rack Unit
134. d procedures for using interfaces to remotely configure and operate an ACS 160 Series or STL 160 Series multiplexer T1 input output power and other specifications appear in Section 7 Specifications Maintenance Technicians If you are already familiar with the ACS 160 Series multiplexers go directly to Section 6 Testing and Troubleshooting for test procedures and troubleshooting guidelines Otherwise you should review Sections 1 through 5 before proceeding to Section 6 Individual channel module manuals give test procedures for the specific channel modules shipped with this system Diagnostic and control access is also available remotely from a PC or dumb terminal 1 3 Multiplexer Configurations The ACS 160 Series and STL 160 Series multiplexers consist of these models e ACS 163 or STL 163 3RU T1 terminal multiplexer e ACS 165 or STL 165 3RU T1 drop and insert multiplexer e ACS 166 or STL 166 3RU T1 dual terminal multiplexer e ACS 167 1RU T1 terminal multiplexer e ACS 168 1RU T1 drop and insert multiplexer e ACS 169 1RU T1 dual multiplexer All ACS 160 Series and STL 160 Series multiplexers are rack mountable in EI A standard 19 racks Full size 3RU shelves ACS 163 ACS 165 ACS 166 STL 163 STL 165 and STL 166 are 51 4 high Figures 1 1 and 1 2 Compact 1RU shelves ACS 167 ACS 168 and ACS 169 are 174 high Figure 1 3 The 1RU versions perform the same functions as their 3RU counterparts but
135. dicates that this shelf is in Line Loopback TxYI Transmit yellow alarm Yellow alarm or Remote Alarm Indication RAI is transmitted when the shelf has lost the incoming signal and is experiencing a loss of frame condition Transmit zeros in Bit 2 of all time slots XsJt Excess jitter XsJt appears in the BLNK group when the CM 5RB T1 receiver jitter buffer has overflowed This normally indicates that the received T1 signal contains excessive timing jitter If an indicator light on the CM 5RB module is blinking perform these steps to determine the cause s 1 Press up or down on the GROUP switch until the display reads BLNK 2 Press down on the SET NEXT switch to display the BLNK group contents If there is more than one BLNK group item press down on the SET NEXT switch repeatedly to cycle through the items 3 To leave the BLNK group press up or down on the GROUP switch Harris Corporation 6 5 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting Version 2 11 August 2011 6 3 3 Performance Data Review RVU1 Group The functions in the RVU1 group Table 6 4 provide status information on e Phase locked loops e Input output timing lock e Jitter buffer The items in the RVU1 group unlike the items in the BLNK group are always available for review The bi level light located just to the right of the four character function display on the CM 5RB module ind
136. differ in the Number of channel modules they can accommodate Type of power supply used Physical orientation of the modules in the shelf Connection points for alarm relays and a ring generator These differences are pointed out in the appropriate sections throughout this manual Note The ACS 166 and ACS 169 Dual Terminal Access Servers use different midplanes from those used in the ACS 163 Terminal Access Server ACS 165 Drop and Insert Access Server ACS 168 Drop and Insert Access Server STL 163 Studio to Transmitter Link and STL 165 Studio to Transmitter Link multiplexers It is not possible to use these five multiplexers as dual terminal access servers The ACS 163 and ACS 167 terminal multiplexers each terminate one T1 circuit The ACS 165 and ACS 168 multiplexers each terminate two T1 circuits and allow channels to pass between the two circuits as well as to terminate at the multiplexer 1 2 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 1 Introduction ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 The ACS 166 and ACS 169 product packages each provide two T1 terminal multiplexers in a single shelf The multiplexers share the same power supply and alarm reporting system but are otherwise independent there is no communication between the two T1 circuits Note Unless otherwise specified all references to the ACS 163 multiplexer also apply to the ACS 167 multiplexer
137. different for E1 lines Table 2 4 BER Threshold Detection Times Detection Time Seconds 10 10 10 10 Extended Superframe ESF 10s 10s 30s 105s 30s N A N A N A Superframe SF The CM 5RB module monitors both the primary and the backup lines for these soft and hard failure conditions If line redundancy is enabled the module compares the primary line is compared with the backup line and decides which line to use If the primary is Good no switch is made If the primary is either Soft Fail or Hard Fail and the backup is Good a switch is made If the primary is Hard Fail and the backup is Soft Fail a switch is made Tables 2 5 and 2 6 summarize these revertive non revertive switching priorities Table 2 5 Failure Switching Precedence Rev Non Rev Line Redundancy and Primary Line Backup Line Status Good Soft Hard gt Good P P P ax B Soft B NC P amp 54 Hard B B NC P Primary Line is active B Backup Line is active NC No Change current state 2 14 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 2 Functional Description ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 2 6 Failure Switching Precedence Non Revertive Line Redundancy and Backup Line Backup Line Status Good Soft Hard gt Good B P P oC un E Soft B NC P amp S Hard B B NC P Primary Line is active B Backup Line is active NC No Change current state Detection tim
138. dules The module adapters are implemented separately to allow replacement of a failed adapter without interruption of service The MA 235 1 adapter is the Primary Module Adapter and the MA 235 2 adapter is the Backup Module Adapter in line redundancy applications Each has an RJ 48 T1 interface with channel service unit CSU protection The combined adapters in both common modules bridge timing in and serial O connectors A single timing out connector is provided and connected to the currently active common module Timing in and timing out signals are transmitted on separate RJ 11 connectors Table 3 4 gives MA 235 1 input and output port assignments Table 3 5 gives MA 235 2 input and output port assignments and Figure 3 8 shows connector locations An external removable shielded cable CA 202 26 pin miniature Sub D provides signal connection between the MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 adapters Harris Corporation 3 7 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 3 4 MA 235 1 I O Ports Port Timing In Timing Out T1 E1 Primary MA 235 1 to MA 235 2 Comm Connector Type Protocol 6 pin phone RS 422 jack 6 pin phone RS 422 jack 8 pin phone T1 E1 jacks 26 pin TTL subminiature D Table 3 5 MA 235 2 I O Ports Port Remote Port DI T1 E1 Backup MA 235 1 to MA 235 2 Comm 3 8 Connector Type Protocol 6 pin phone RS 232
139. e Far end Operation Independent switching decisions are made at each end of the line redundant system Consequently a unidirectional failure within a T1 facility could result in a switch occurring at only one end of the circuit In this case traffic would be split with outbound traffic traveling on one T1 service and the return traffic traveling on the other a potentially cumbersome line maintenance situation You can prevent this situation by selecting Yellow Alarm as a line switching criterion After the correct integration time the end of the circuit that detects the line failure sends Yellow Alarm The Yellow Alarm in turn causes the other end of the circuit to switch ensuring that both directions of T1 traffic are on the backup T1 line Yellow Alarm is always sent if LOS LOF or AIS are detected Yellow is also sent if UAS or BER have been selected as switching criteria and the selected error rate threshold has been exceeded Switching of each end of the line is completed in 500 milliseconds with LSDLY line switch delay set to 0 The 500 millisecond switching periods for the two ends of the line are not time synchronized 2 1 4 11 Module or Line Redundancy Alarms and Alerts Line or module failures that result in loss of service generate a shelf Alarm Table 2 7 A failure of the standby module or line that does not interrupt service generates a shelf alert A failure of the active module or line that results in a successful protection s
140. e Informational items such as the CM 5RB firmware revision The groups are accessed from two different configuration group menus e Basic configuration This group menu provides the settings used in most configuration setups Section 3 2 CM 5RB Basic Configuration Group Menu gives a detailed explanation of the menu settings e Advanced configuration This group menu provides settings for CM 5R TD functions and other specialized applications that rarely need adjustment in most systems Section 3 3 CM 5RB Advanced Configuration Group Menu gives a detailed explanation of the menu settings 1 8 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 1 Introduction ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 1 5 1 1 CM 5RB Function Displaying When the CM 5RB display is blank or when a function is displayed press down on the GROUP toggle switch to view the name of the currently selected group Once the current group name is displayed press down on the GROUP switch again to select the next group or press up to select the previous group until the desired group is displayed Press down on the SET NEXT switch to display the first function in the currently selected group Once a function appears press down on the SET NEXT switch repeatedly until the desired function is displayed The bi level indicator light set to the right of the function display indicates the status of the currently displayed
141. e RX IN indicator lights are on there is receive activity but no frame synchronization In that case perform these steps a Call your T1 carrier to find out what kind of frame format is in use on the T1 circuit Make sure that this format is set correctly on the multiplexers at both ends of the T1 circuit b If the frame format is set correctly but the system is still out of frame the CM 5RB module might be bad Replace it with a spare 8 Verify the LPBK light is off all the loopbacks should be off 9 If the RX IN light is blinking set the alphanumeric display to the BLNK group to determine the cause This display might also indicate that all the active channels in the system are sending data that is almost all ones Perform one of these steps depending on the BLNK group display e Ifthe display reads RxYI the multiplexer is receiving a yellow alarm Contact your T1 carrier to resolve the problem e If the display reads Rx11 the multiplexer is receiving an all ones signal meaning that there are no active channels in the system Check the channel modules at each end of the circuit e Ifthe display reads XsJt there is severe jitter on the T1 circuit Contact your T1 carrier to resolve the problem 10 If the ERR and or the BPV indicator lights are blinking erratically there are errors on the T1 circuit In that case perform these steps a Call your T1 carrier to determine whether the circuit is set up to use B8ZS or AMI line cod
142. e Receive port 2 e Receive port 3 e Receive port 4 e Receive port 5 5 12 tT fs E t 2 N a al a 2 0 3 3 v26 Dno EU ztu Oo Oo av ac EF E EE E E re as E Fr a a 3 kii Ei zu zuo o o m m coo cy ki ki zu zu o o t Y N EN Sge Sm ot spo Eta 2 XL 67 SNe oc Qo U O a Yj Pai stap E L t z O54 Ln r D Ls woe Fadi T e EY Be let 9 d na m i ZG gt m o B c 3 H f o 7 mn P Ei 2 N pa lt r a 5 a na o o t zu R EED 6 Ld 99g 2 a M n mee f 979 E rtg 2 N Cea 29575 Had E ET BE Goyl m ao coo T E n gt 2 zu o st t zo a3 Se 2 d 259 oc LY ac Oo ate SR e e E t E y t 2 N 7 o0 ws n EM V4 MIS 77 u dti lt 95 ate w H E E 9 A ao ey c P r E ra 9 Ez o i o H 5 9 H Y 1 N Hi N E x Slave e x e z 9 Figure 5 10 Pass through Configuration The required time slot mapping for CrossConnect A is time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 2 time slot 24 time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 3 time slot 24 time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 4 time slot 24 time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 5 time slot 24 time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 6 time slot 24 5 Remote Control Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp
143. e T1 circuit level with the system in service or out of service You can also perform tests on individual channels within the system The next sections describe these test types 6 5 1 T1 Test Jacks A CM 5RB module has two pairs of bantam jacks T1 IN and T1 OUT to provide test access to the T1 input and output signals Each pair consists of one equipment EQUIP and one monitor MON jack Figure 6 5 T1 input test jacks T1 output test jacks SEU PS naan i ul T1 OUT T1 IN Figure 6 5 T1 Test Jacks Harris Corporation 6 13 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting Version 2 11 August 2011 The two equipment jacks are used for out of service testing When you insert a plug into the Equipment In jack the incoming T1 signal from the MA 215 module is disconnected from the T1 receiver on the CM 5RB module and a signal can be injected at this point to the CM 5RB module Similarly when a plug is inserted into the NETWK OUT jack the output of the CM 5RB T1 transmitter is disconnected from the MA 215 module and a signal can be injected at this point to the network The two MON jacks are designed for in service testing and are therefore equipped with isolation amplifiers Because of these amplifiers the T1 signals received and transmitted by the multiplexer can be monitored without
144. e T1 test set manufacturers When a CM 5RB module uses internal INT timing whether primary or fallback the TxLk function is normally off However when any other timing mode is in use EXT THRU LOOP the TxLK function is normally on and a fault condition is indicated when it is off 4 4 4 Timing Mode Use Figures 4 4 through 4 8 show appropriate uses of each of the four T1 transmitter timing modes In ACS 160 Series systems synchronized to the digital network both terminal multiplexers are normally be loop timed Figure 4 4 and Figure 4 6 In systems timed from one end and not synchronized to the carrier s network one terminal is internally or externally timed while the other is loop timed Figures 4 5 4 7 and 4 8 Figure 4 8 shows an ACS 160 Series system with an external timing Source Harris Corporation 4 13 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 4 Setup amp Configuration Version 2 11 August 2011 Loop Loop Timed Timed Internally Loop Timed Timed Figure 4 5 Point to Point System I nternally Timed from One End Not Synchronized to Network Timing Timing Loop Through Loop Timed Timed Timed gt 5S ACS PTT uu ACS PTT ACS 1 d 163 T1 Circuit Network T1 Circuit 165 T1 Circuit Network T1 Circuit 163 a Timing Timing 4 4 Figure 4 6 Drop and Insert System Synchronized to Netwo
145. e data coming through on their selected time slot s Data in time slots not in 2 2 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 2 Functional Description ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 use by any local channel module passes through as before You can use a receive only channel module to monitor a channel passing through without affecting its passage 2 1 3 CM 5RB Common Modules The CM 5RB common module the core building blocks of ACS 160 and STL 160 Series multiplexers provides one full duplex T1 port The ACS 163 or ACS 167 terminal multiplexer has one CM 5RB module The ACS 166 or ACS 169 dual terminal multiplexer or the ACS 165 or ACS 168 drop and insert multiplexer has two CM 5RB modules The CM 5RB module provides these basic operational functions Channel multiplexing to form the T1 aggregate T1 line driver output Transmit timing functions T1 line receiver input T1 aggregate demultiplexing to individual channels Loopback configurations Microprocessor control User interface Figure 2 4 shows a functional diagram of the CM 5RB module EH RU EQUI Rx In BP To From Channel DeMUX Bus Modules Demultiplexer Line Receiver Recovered Timing I oc Frame N Synchronization lt I 1 Out i um Line Equipment NAE Nu NETWK Tx Out it W LBO Ys it select 7 output Line Driver Pa
146. e of three internal CM 5RB loopbacks line equipment or payload is active 2 8 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 2 Functional Description ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 2 1 CM 5RB Indicator Lights continued Light Description CPU Central processing unit of CM 5RB module red SU ON A microprocessor or memory fault has been detected on CM 5RB module CPU failure is reported as an alarm to shelf alarm circuitry This light turns on briefly at power up 2 1 4 Redundancy ACS 160 Series multiplexers can have two levels of redundancy e Module redundancy Two CM 5RB modules are installed and if the primary one fails the backup module takes over e Module and line redundancy Not only are two CM 5RB modules installed but two T1 lines are also connected The system is protected against either the primary CM 5RB module or the primary T1 circuit failing 2 1 4 1 Redundant CM 5RB Module Operation The CM 5RB module installed in front of the MA 235 1 module adapter assumes the role of Primary CM The CM 5RB module installed in front of the MA 235 2 assumes the role of Backup CM During normal operation both primary and backup common modules transmit the same T1 payload data through both the primary and backup lines Only one common module the Active CM is used at a given time to receive T1 data The common module not being used to process recei
147. ec modules that provide MPEG Layer 2 and Layer 3 MP3 compressed audio Each channel module s transmit side converts its input into one or more 64 kbps time slots and places this information onto the transmit bus on the midplane for multiplexing by the CM 5RB module Section 2 1 3 CM 5RB Common Modules Similarly each channel module s receive side takes the 2 20 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 2 Functional Description ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 incoming demultiplexed digital information from its designated time slot s on the receive bus on the midplane and converts it back to its original format for output 2 1 6 1 Simplex versus Duplex Channel Modules Most circuit types such as voice and two way data circuits are full duplex that is they support simultaneous two way operation Full duplex circuits require identical full duplex transmit receive channel modules at both ends of the channel they occupy within an ACS 160 system Other circuit types such as program audio channels are simplex that is they always have a transmitter module at one end and a receiver module at the other Figure 2 13 shows multiple channel modules of various types in a three site system using both terminal and drop and insert multiplexers Most full duplex two way channel modules can also be set up to operate in a simplex one way mode Site 1 Site 2 Site 3
148. ect the SCM IP module via the MA 440 module adapter directly to a computer When connecting the module and module adapter you must use a Category 5 or better LOBASE T patch cable The SCM IP module provides an interface between an SNMP network manager and the Intraplex common and channel modules The SCM IP module maintains a database of control alarm and status information for the installed modules in a sub network of Intraplex equipment This database is updated when you select Auto Detect via the Web browser and click Submit after the results are displayed You can also use the database to reflect the structure of the controlled Intraplex Products sub network The Web pages display the devices stored in this internal database of the SCM IP module On these Web pages there are a number of description fields you can fill in which are visible when performing MIB queries of the module via an SNMP Manager To configure the SCM IP Web server you must know the IP address and the Web browser user name and password assigned to the module A default user name and password are set at the factory scm intraplex If the IP Address DIP Switch Switch 2 Position 3 is in the OFF position there are two possible paths you can take depending upon whether the system is configured to use a fixed IP address or request an IP Address from the DHCP Server The default IP address is 192 168 0 100 The SCM IP module recognizes the DHCP protocol When powered
149. ed Configuration Group Menu Figure 3 4 shows a drop and insert configuration Term DI A DI B Term LELET MELET wD o wD o wono oD o cooozc wD o Figure 3 4 Basic Drop and Insert Configuration Drop and insert redundancy requires four common modules in a shelf two for DI A and two for DI B It also requires special cabling between the module adapters Table 3 1 gives MA 235 1 switch settings Section 2 2 4 Drop and Insert Multiplexers and Section 2 2 5 Drop and Insert Systems give more information on drop and insert functionality 3 4 2 2 Front Panel User I nterface Figure 3 5 presents the CM 5RB front panel user interface FPUI and switch locations When power is first applied to the chassis the 4 character display on the primary and backup common module s front panels indicate the system multiplexing mode Figure 3 6 and Table 3 1 NETWK MON EQUIP MON GROUP FRONTPANEL ON SET 5 Zgz amp zt xg SWITCH DISPLAY or wx 9 RHE LCT AES T1 OUT TLIN SWITCHE TIMING Figure 3 5 CM 5RB FPUI 4 character Display Location 3 4 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 3 Installation amp Wiring ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Front Panel User Interfaces at power up o o oe ol SERRE RS gera ERE CM 5R Backup O OJO Ol terri SS a ema ea CM 5R Primary
150. ed in the individual channel module manuals 6 2 T1 Multiplexer Monitor amp Control Features The front edge of the CM 5RB common module contains several jacks switches and indicator lights Figure 6 1 which fall into three basic categories e Test access The left side of the module contains T1 input and output test jacks Section 6 5 1 T1 Test Jacks e Configuration The center section contains these items that work together to enable you to view and change module operational parameters e GROUP and SET NEXT switches e Afour character alphanumeric display for abbreviated group and function names A bi level light set green on top red on the bottom that indicates whether the function shown on the display is currently active Harris Corporation 6 1 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting Version 2 11 August 2011 e Status Monitoring The twelve indicator lights on the module s right side have these functions T1 status Primary timing status Loopback activity e CPU activity T1 input Function SET NEXT Transmit test jacks 4 character switch timing display T1 output Grou ON OFF T1 status Loopback test jacks switc switch CPU amp Yellow BPV s O O9 O mstn ES a ara ERR a x EE J is MON EQUIP MON GROUP FUNCTION ON SET BEES RXIN O ERR FRM EXT O Z CPU OFF NEXT TX OUT T1
151. ed to be approximately 30 milliseconds and closer measurements then indicate that the true target value is 29 95 milliseconds First determine the correct buffer depth in bits for the desired delay Here is the algorithm 1 Divide the desired delay time by the T1 1 544 Mbps bit duration 488 nanoseconds 2 Subtract five from the result 3 Look at this number in 17 bit binary format For this example we get 30 mS 647 67 nS 46320 46320 5 46315 Decimal 46315 binary01011010011101011 EN SBP3P4 29 95 mS 647 67 nS 46243 46243 5 46238 Decimal 46238 binary01011010010011110 EN SBP3P4 Then to make these changes issue this series of ISiCL commands C2 SET P2 B00000000 Select step change and set most significant bit to 0 C2 SET P3 B10110100 Set high order 8 bits for 30 milliseconds C2 SET P4 B11101011 Set low order 8 bits for 30 milliseconds A 4 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products A ISiCL CM 5RTD Delay Configuration ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Version 2 1 April 2011 C2 SET P2 100000000 Select smooth change C2 SET P4 B10011110 Set low order 8 bits for 29 95 milliseconds no change in high order 8 bits is required A 5 Delay Setting with RS 422 Control Port This method uses the RS 422 control port to change the delay value The control port is part of the physical external timing input connector Table 2 10 shows the MA 215 M
152. el module to transmit and receive via the CM 5RB module designated as DI A Setting the TX A BUS or TERM switch off up sets a channel module to transmit and receive via the CM 5RB module designated as DI B using the TX B bus and the RX A bus Figure 2 3 TX A BUS lt RX A BUS Ti rans T 3 Channel module Channel module P RX B BUS A l H MM gt Physical TX B BU S Physical slot 1 slot 2 Figure 2 3 Drop and Insert Multiplexer Signal Bus On some older channel module designs there are two switches one for the transmit side and one for the receive side These two switches should always be set to opposite directions In a terminal multiplexer or to communicate via the DI A port in a drop and insert multiplexer set the switches to transmit A receive B To communicate via the DI B port in a drop and insert multiplexer set the switches to transmit B receive A Individual channel module manuals give the location and labeling of these switches on the modules provided with this system As Figure 2 3 shows in a drop and insert multiplexer the RX A bus connects to the TX A bus and the RX B bus connects to the TX B bus When there are no active channel modules in a drop and insert multiplexer all T1 signal time slots coming from each direction transfer to the outgoing T1 signal in the other direction When any transmit only or full duplex channel modules are installed and active their output overrides th
153. en ON state the primary line is being used If the ON OFF light is red OFF state the backup line is being used You can also use this item to manually generate a switch to the primary line by momentarily toggling the SET NEXT switch to the UP position Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 4 Setup amp Configuration ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 4 12 LRDN Group Menu Functions continued Group BACK SDLY RDLY FAIL configure on both primary and backup CMs BER configure on both primary and backup CMs Item N A 0S 0 5 1S Factory default 10S Exit 10S Factory default 1lmin 5min Exit LOS On Off Factory default is on OOF On Off Factory default is on AIS On Off Factory default is on UAS On Off Factory default is off YEL On Off Factory default is off Exit Off Factory default 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 Exit Harris Corporation Intraplex Products Description Displays the use of the backup line If the indicator light is green ON state the backup line is being used If the light is red OFF state the primary line is being used You can also use this item to manually generate a switch to the backup line by momentarily toggling the SET NEXT switch to the UP position Line redundancy failure integration time of 0 seconds Line redundancy failure integration time of
154. ent damage or shipping errors please contact Harris Customer Service Harris Corporation 3 1 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 3 Installation amp Wiring Version 2 11 August 2011 e U S Canada and Latin America 1 217 222 8200 or tsupport harris com e Europe Middle East and Africa 44 118 964 8100 or Service europe harris com e Asia and Pacific Rim 852 2776 0628 or BCDService harris com Warning Follow all of your company s rules regarding AC or DC powered equipment installation If M there is a conflict between any procedure in this manual and your company s safety rules your company s safety rules must take priority 3 3 Multiplexer Shelf Installation ACS 160 Series multiplexers are normally shipped pre configured with common and channel modules already installed All modules and module adapters can remain in place while bolting each shelf into its equipment rack 1 Bolt the shelf into its equipment rack Allow at least a 1RU that is 1 75 high of space between shelves when using DC supplies or 2RU of space a total of 3 5 when using AC supplies to avoid possible heat problems 2 Make sure all modules module adapters and module interface units are seated properly Note If the shelf is AC powered make sure that the power cable is accessible for maintenance purposes Each 3RU Intraplex shelf can contain a second power supp
155. er No network communications at these common modules Figure 5 4 Common Module Configuration Settings Common Module DSO Address Each common module can be assigned a network address a four digit number from 0001 to 9999 used to distinguish different multiplexers on a common network If multiple multiplexers are connected to a common network each multiplexer can receive every command issued by the central controller By including the target multiplexer s network address in the ISiCL command you can ensure that only the target multiplexer responds to that command For DSO management communications the network address must be set Use the CM 5RB front panel user interface to enter each multiplexer s address Section 5 1 1 2 Multiple Common Module Addressing Redundant CM 5RB modules in either a terminal or drop and insert multiplexer must share the same network address All CM 5RB modules in a drop and insert multiplexer must share the same network address Two addresses are required for a dual terminal multiplexer one address for all CM 5RB modules in each section 5 1 2 2 Network Topologies You can use DSO management communications in a variety of network topologies ranging from simple point to point systems to complex meshed networks combining ring and star segments You can establish DSO management communications throughout any of these network
156. es for line failures depend on the nature of the failure conditions The total time to switch to line protection after the start of any Hard Failure condition does not exceed 500 milliseconds including detection time and re frame time unless a switching delay time has been selected the SDLY group in the LRDN menu on Table 4 23 You can select from a range of available line switching delays The selected delay begins when a line failure condition is detected If the condition persists throughout the delay period the line is switched The programmable switching delay values are 0 seconds 0 5 seconds 1 seconds 10 seconds You can manually force line switching via the front panel switches or ISiCL command If a line switch is forced manually the system reverts according to normal failure switching precedence For a permanent manual switch set line redundancy mode to OFF before initiating the manual switch 2 1 4 7 Manual Switching for Line Failure If a line failure condition occurs and is later cleared but the control is not reverted to the primary CM 5RB common module CM you can manually switch by e Removing and reinstalling the primary CM e Manually switching at the front panel display MRDN gt gt PRIM 2 1 4 8 Line Redundancy Revertive Operation You can configure line redundancy for revertive or non revertive switching separately for line and module redundancy If you select revertive switching for line redundancy operat
157. f REV B8 or higher stamped on the circuit boards Note CM 5RB modules are fully interchangeable Any CM 5RB module can be used as a primary terminal DI A or DI B multiplexer Any CM 5RB module can also be used as a backup terminal backup DI A or backup DI B multiplexer 3 2 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 3 Installation amp Wiring ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 3 4 2 CM 5RB Combined Module and Line Redundancy Installation To install line and module redundancy perform these steps 1 Set the switches on the module adapters MAs 2 Install the adapters in the first two adjacent slots in the shelf Figure 3 1 Midplane 26 pin connector CA 202 MA 235 2 CM 5RB Backup MA 235 1 CM 5RB Primary Rear of Multiplexer Front of Multiplexer Figure 3 1 Top View of Redundancy Modules and Paired Line Redundancy Adapters Connect these two MAs with the CA 202 shielded cable Insert the primary CM 5RB module in front of the primary MA MA 235 1 In the adjacent slot insert the backup CM 5RB module Figure 3 1 in front of the backup MA MA 235 2 6 Enable the redundancy feature through the front panel control of the common module or by using ISiCL commands Section 4 8 CM 5RB Module amp Line Redundancy Figures 3 2 and 3 3 show combination module and line redundant modules Note Common modules are i
158. figuration If this installation includes a CSU the frame format and line code settings must be identical on both the multiplexers and the CSUs Use ESF framing and B8ZS line code whenever possible 1 Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display reads TSEL 2 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch to cycle through the available functions in the TSEL group The green top bi level indicator light turns on when the display shows the currently set selection for frame format ESF or SF and line coding B8ZS or AMI The red bottom indicator light turns on when the display shows the configurations that are not selected for each function 3 To change either of the current settings perform these steps a Press down on the SET NEXT switch until the display shows the desired setting The green top light blinks indicating a change is about to be made b Press up twice on the SET NEXT switch The green light turns on continuously indicating the function on the display is active Table 4 8 Framing and Line Coding Configurations Function Description SF Superframe format An order frame format in which T1 frame 193 bits are grouped into 12 frame superframes also referred to as D4 Generally use the SF format only if the carrier s network cannot support ESF ESF Extended superframe format A more recent frame format in which T1 frames are grouped into 24 frame extended superframes The ESF format provides better er
159. firmware revision Detailed explanations of the basic CM 5RB functions appear in these sections e T1 operational functions TIME and TSEL in Section 4 Setup and Configuration e Remote access setup functions ADDR and SIO in Section 5 Remote Control Operation e Diagnostic functions LPBK BLNK RVU1 and DIAG in Section 6 Testing and Troubleshooting Use the GROUP switch to select a particular function group and the SET NEXT switch to view and set functions within the currently selected group The four character alphanumeric display shows 2 6 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 2 Functional Description ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 both group and function names and the bi level ON OFF indicator lights signify the status of the currently displayed function Display CM 5RB Functions To display the CM 5RB functions perform these steps 1 When the CM 5RB display is blank or when a function is displayed press down on the group toggle switch to view the name of the currently selected group 2 Oncethe current group name is displayed press down on the group switch again to select the next group or press up to select the previous group until the desired group is displayed 3 Press down on the SET NEXT switch to display the first function in the currently selected group 4 Once a function appears press down on the SET NEXT switch repeated
160. function If the top green light is on this function is active If the bottom red light is on the function is not active 1 5 1 2 CM 5RB Function Setting To turn on a function that is not currently active press up twice on the SET NEXT switch while that function is on the display Pressing up once causes the top green light to blink indicating that a setup change takes place if the SET NEXT switch is pressed up again Actually pressing up on the SET NEXT switch a second time causes the green light to turn on continuously indicating that the selected setup parameter has been changed to the currently displayed setting If a function is already active pressing up on the SET NEXT switch again causes no status or setup changes For example if the display shows ESF while frame format is set to SF the red light is on Pressing up on the SET NEXT switch once causes the top green light to blink Pressing up on the SET NEXT switch a second time actually changes the current T1 framing format from SF to ESF the red light goes out and the green light stays on It is important to note that some setup functions are mutually exclusive activating one function automatically deactivates another such as e Line code you can set the line code to AMI or B8ZS but not both e Frame format you can set the frame format to SF or ESF but not both Other functions are not mutually exclusive such as the CM 5RB Line LnLB and Equipment EqLB loopback
161. guration installation operation and troubleshooting of Intraplex ACS 160 Series and STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexers If you have any questions on the operation of your Intraplex system and cannot find the answers in this manual please contact Harris Customer Service e U S Canada and Latin America 1 217 222 8200 or tsupport harris com e Europe Middle East and Africa 44 118 964 8100 or Service europe harris com e Asia and Pacific Rim 852 2776 0628 or BCDService harris com Harris Corporation 1 1 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 1 Introduction Version 2 11 August 2011 1 2 Manual Use Keep in mind that all references in this manual to the 3RU ACS 160 Series multiplexers are equally applicable to the STL 160 Series multiplexers For general information use these guidelines Readers Unfamiliar with the ACS 160 Series Multiplexers You can use this manual as a tutorial by reading or skimming all sections in order Installers f you are already familiar with the ACS 160 Series multiplexers go directly to Section 3 Installation and Wiring for step by step installation instructions Otherwise you should read at least the rest of this introductory section before beginning Transmission and Planning Engineers Section 4 Setup amp Configuration gives ACS 160 Series configuration guidelines Section 5 Remote Control Operation gives information an
162. has detected a failure of the primary module and is now the active common module SWITCHED TO BACKUP LINE The backup line was judged to be better than the primary line given the user defined line criteria and the backup is now the active line PRI MARY LINE FAILURE The primary line has met the user defined criteria for failure BACKUP LINE FAILURE The backup line has met the user defined criteria for failure PRIMARY MODULE FAILURE The backup module has detected a failure of the primary module BACKUP MODULE FAILURE The primary module has detected a failure of the backup module MANUAL SWITCH Manually generated module or line switch over RECEI VE BER EXCEEDS USER SETTING The measured line BER exceeds the user defined threshold for line failure Note The next status condition can only be generated if this condition is true ESF Extended Superframe Framing Primary Backup 5 32 ALARM RECEI VE UNAVAI LABLE SECOND UAS T1 service in unavailable state UAS Note In FTI mode this message is generated if the T1 line is in a UAS state In non FTI mode this message is generated if the T1 line is in a UAS state and UAS is enabled as a line switch criterion Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 5 12 Line Module Redundancy I SiCL STATUS Error Messages continued Line Module She
163. he jitter buffer depth has been exceeded This light might flash if there is noise on the line ERR Errors yellow 7 FLASH Light flashes each time a CRC 6 error is detected YEL Yellow alarm yellow i ON An upstream failure Loss of signal detected from an upstream source BPV Bipolar violations yellow 5E FLASH A light flashes each time a bipolar violation is detected ON The random bit error ratio exceeds 10 AIS Alarm Indication Signal yellow ON An upstream failure has been detected FRM Out of frame red red ON CM 5RB T1 receiver is not in frame synchronization which might be caused by a high bit error ratio the absence of a T1 receive signal or improper CM 5RB module configuration LOOP Loop or through timing green On ACS 163 terminal multiplexer ON The T1 transmitter is loop timed BLINK The loop is selected for primary timing but the module is currently using fallback timing On ACS 165 drop and insert multiplexer ON The T1 transmitter is through timed BLINK Through is selected for primary timing but the module is currently using fallback timing INT Internal timing green pl ON The CM 5RB transmitter is using its internal 1 544 MHz clock EXT External timing green m ON The CM 5RB transmitter is using timing provided by an external clock BLINK External is selected for primary timing but the module is currently using fallback timing LPBK Loopback yellow ON One or mor
164. he shelf With no channel modules active the T1 transmitter produces an all ones signal which is looped back to the T1 receiver 7 Verify that the indicator lights respond Table 6 6 Press all the channel modules firmly back into their sockets 9 Perform one or more channel tests using available VF data and other type test sets These tests might include level tests on voice channels bit error tests on data channels and so on Figure 6 9 Note data channels At this stage you can perform channel tests only on 4 wire voice channels or full duplex 10 When channel tests are complete take down the loopback either by removing the patch cord or by deactivating the equipment loopback 11 In a field test only If the network configuration requires this multiplexer to use a timing source other than internal perform these steps to reset the timing source a Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display shows TI ME b Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch until the display shows the desired timing source LOOP or EXT C Press up twice on the SET NEXT switch to reset transmit timing to the source currently displayed 12 Reconnect the T1 input output connector RJ 48C to the MA 215 module adapter at the rear of the CM 5RB module or DB 15 on the MA 216 adapter Table 6 6 Indicator Lights in Terminal Multiplexer Loopback Test Equip T1 OUT jacks Mon Equip T1 IN
165. hen the module is locked no setup changes can be made via the module s remote port The LOCK feature prevents accidental or unauthorized remote setup changes to ACS 160 Series multiplexers that are permanently connected to dial up phone lines or dedicated data lines The LOCK feature has no effect on local operation setup changes including locking and unlocking the remote port can always be done locally The LOCK command has this format lt Address gt lt Subaddress gt LOCK Note that the parameter field is left blank The UNLOCK command has a slightly different format in that its parameter field must include the password of the addressed multiplexer lt Address gt lt Subaddress gt UNLOCK lt Password gt For example assume that an ACS 165 multiplexer has been set up with an address of 8 and a password of BLUE To unlock the remote port on its DI A module make setup changes and then relock the module first issue this command sequence 8 DI A UNLOCK BLUE Lu Then include one or more SET commands 8 DI A LOCK Change Password In addition to an address you can assign a password to each multiplexer Once the multiplexer s remote port s have been locked you must know the password to make any remote setup changes You can assign the same password or different passwords to all of the multiplexers in a given network depending on your requirements Valid passwords consist of any string of letters and numbers
166. hielded cable between the two adapters To hot swap an adapter you need to first remove the corresponding common module and then remove the interconnecting cable CA 202 Perform this procedure to replace the failed adapter To replace a MA 235 1 or MA 235 2 module adapter perform these steps 1 Remove the corresponding common module 2 Remove the MA to MA cable CA 202 3 Remove the failed adapter 4 Install the new adapter 5 Install the MA to MA cable 6 Install the corresponding common module The modules then go through the revertive process per the module line redundancy settings 3 6 Wiring amp Power These guidelines assume that the multiplexers are completely wired before placing any T1 or payload circuit into service Figures 3 9 and 3 10 identify the rear panel connectors for the 3RU and 1RU equipment shelves respectively 3 10 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 3 Installation amp Wiring ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Module Adapters SIG BAT BAT BAT BAT BAT A B A B LELII ALERT ALARM NO COM NC NO COM NC eoscoe Terminal strip 2 alert and alarm relays FOR USE WITH Y SERIES POWER SUPPLIES ONLY MA 215 for MA 215 for Blank plate covering access AC power in replaced by a blank DI B CM 5RB DI A CM 5RB to expansion connectors plate if the shelf is DC powered Figure 3 9 Rear
167. hrough other subgroup options To exit from a subgroup perform these steps 1 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch until the display reads EXIT 2 Press up once on the SET NEXT switch to move to the next group Figure 4 3 details the flow of the Advanced Configuration Group menu and Table 4 3 supplements that information with a complete description of each group Harris Corporation 4 7 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 4 8 m FTIM Li X FLoo Fint Default FExt FSec exit la LA RTIM n i Off Auto Default M RXGN a 36dB exit JBUF a Joff J 32 Default J128 Jrst exit f2 4 2 5 ba TXYL A Off lt On Auto ESF Default exit d 30dB Default 3 5 Default exit _____ exit 4 gt TYPE 4 X VRM T1 Default exit lt r PRIM 4 TERM DI A DI B SPAR exit r PLL X Auto Default Narr Wide exit lt CUST 4 X Std Default KT STL EIB FTI lt 4 r Topt 4 y R Rx 4 r Rcpu t Figure 4 3 CM 5RB Advanced Configuration Group Menu Structure Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 4 Setup amp Configuration 4 Setup amp Configuration ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Opera
168. icates the state of each RVU1 function Table 6 4 RVU1 Group Function Description TxLk Transmit lock The bi level on off light indicates the status of the T1 transmitter PLL ON Es For looped or external timing if the top green light is on the transmitter PLL is OFF iul locked For internal timing this light should be on all the time ON If the bottom red light is on the transmitter PLL is not locked Li OFF RxLk Receive lock The bi level on off light indicates the status of the T1 receiver PLL ON Es If the top green light is on the receiver PLL is locked OFF ful ON fm If the bottom red light is on the receiver PLL is not locked OFF Eg TxRx Transmit Receive clocks The bi level on off light indicates whether or not the transmit and receive bus clocks are synchronized on E3 If the top green light is on the transmit and receive bus clocks are synchronized OFF fm ON fm If the bottom red light is on the transmit and receive bus clocks are not OFF Eg synchronized If the top green and bottom red lights are toggling on and off the transmit and ON receive signals are not synchronized but their frequencies are close OFF Ead In this situation each flash of the bottom red light corresponds to a relative phase change of one T1 unit interval UI or about 648 nS A relative phase change of one UI is sometimes called a bit slip XsJt Excess jitter The bi level on off light indicates whether or not the re
169. ice is on POl 4 B00000100 Starting time slot is 4 P02 0 B00000000 P02 Not used PO3 0 B00000000 P03 Not used P04 0O B00000000 P04 Not used POS 9 B00001001 RCH_ON and TERM set to On P06 20 B00010100 Sample rate 48 kHz with 24 bit word P07 11 B00001011 Signal gain set to 20 dBu You can change the configuration of a channel module by issuing SET commands with the appropriate sub address and parameter For example assuming that channel module 3 in multiplexer 20 is a PT 153 program audio transmitter you could select 16 bit coding for its left and right channels by issuing the two commands in Table 5 14 Table 5 14 Commands for Setting PT 150C Coding Command Meaning 20 C3 8ET P07 0 Set the left channel coding to 16 bits 20 C3 SET P08 0 Set the right channel coding to 16 bits You can enter parameter values for channel modules in the parameter field of a SET command as either decimal or binary numbers For example these two commands are perceived as identical by the multiplexer multiplexer address gt lt card address gt Sl multiplexer address gt lt card address gt sS P2 3 P2 B00000011 Warning Binary numbers must be preceded by the letter B or they are interpreted as decimal numbers The next two examples show channel module remote operation in ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series multiplexers Example 1 Turn Modules On and Off For this examp
170. ile a five port data module may use one time slot to transmit up to five data circuits each operating at 9 6 kbps Other channel module types require multiple time slots per circuit For example wideband data modules may be configured to operate at rates up to 1 536 Mbps and therefore may use from one to twenty four time slots simplex or full duplex within a given T1 circuit Similarly high fidelity audio channel modules may use up to eighteen time slots to support one 15 kHz CD quality stereo circuit Remember however that one way channels high fidelity audio modules and data modules operating in simplex mode use time slots in one direction of the T1 circuit only the same time slots remain available for other one way channels in the return direction 2 1 7 Module Adapters All common and channel modules use plug in module adapters to provide the connectors for the individual and aggregate channel interfaces In most cases one module adapter is required for each module on a one to one basis however certain module adapters provide connections for more than one module Power supply modules require no module adapters All module adapters have the same connector on their front edge to mate with the shelf midplane but some module adapters have different rear edge connectors providing a variety of interfaces Figure 2 14 Modules common channel Module power etc Main or expansion shelf adapters X Front Rear Eject Tab Bac
171. ily when the receive input signal is all ones a yellow alarm or has excess jitter May flash if there is excess noise on the input signal On when logic errors are detected On when bipolar violations are detected On when T1 signal is out of frame or no signal is being received On when there is a yellow alarm On when an Alarm Indication Signal AI S has been detected On when loop timing is active through timing on a drop insert multiplexer On when internal timing is active On when external timing is active On when any internal loopback is active On when the CM 5RB central processing unit has failed On when the multiplexer is powered On when no alert or alarm is present On when an alert condition exists On when an alarm condition exists Section 6 3 5 defines alert and alarm conditions Harris Corporation Intraplex Products Section 2 Functional Design This section explains the functions of the ACS 160 and STL 160 Series multiplexer components and describes how to use the multiplexers to configure both point to point and drop and insert T1 systems 2 1 Component Functionality 2 1 1 Main Equipment Shelf and Midplane All modules module adapters and power supplies plug into the main equipment shelf These components communicate with each other via the shelf midplane or motherboard which contains both signal and power distribution buses Figure 2 1 3 m m m 4m 3 25
172. ing b Make sure that this format is set correctly on the multiplexers and the CSUs if present at both ends of the T1 circuit C Check that the T1 connecting cables at each end of the circuit are properly shielded and are no more than 150 feet 45 7 meters long 6 6 4 Power Supply Test Perform these steps to test your power supply 1 If the power supply does not appear to be functioning remove it and check the fuse on the supply 2 If the fuse is bad replace it with an identical type and reinsert the module 3 If the fuse is good use a VOM to test for correct voltages at the test points Figure 6 12 Warning Point E9 is close to the edge of the card especially on a 1RU shelf be careful not to let the test probe touch the chassis while testing this point Test point E12 is ground The correct voltages are Harris Corporation 6 19 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting Version 2 11 August 2011 e E9 to E12 5 3 VDC 0 1 VDC e E10 to E12 15 5 VDC 1 25 VDC e E11 to E12 15 5 VDC 1 25 VDC 4 If the voltages are correct but the indicator lights on the power supply are not on the fault probably lies either with the internal connection to the motherboard or with the blocking diode that allows two power supplies to work together POWER LED VISIBLE WITH COVER ATTACHED NORMAL LED VISIBLE WITH COVER ATTACH
173. ion in Section 2 changing backplane to midplane in all locations Added note to Sections 1 and 2 regarding inability to convert most models into other models Listed models that could be converted Converted entire manual into Word placed in new template reformatted and updated for line redundancy and power supplies Section 7 1 Pages Editor 7 4 LD 7 5 3 6 3 7 3 12 3 23 LD 3 6 6 3 Cover 2 1 3 2 2 1 All 3 22 3 23 3 24 Cover LD 2 1 2 29 1 2 2 1 All LD This page is left blank intentionally Table of Contents Section 1 Introduction TEM Miu eh NR SOR ERROR 1 1 ll Manual SCOpDe noo C EDO TO TR ea ned Be M ha IU SEMI eee 1 1 1 7 Manuallse is aedi A x EE RR RR due Md E est ded 1 2 1 3 Multiplexer Configurations 0 0 c cece ee eee ee eee ee eee eee mme 1 2 1 4 Multiplexer Component Parts 2 0 04 ce2c sseceseciccses trate ane R RE REX RYGRRZA XS SG 1 3 1 4 1 Main Equipment Shelf cece eee enne ee enne nenne 1 3 1 4 2 CM 5RB Common Modules ssssssssssss mmm mener 1 4 1 4 3 Channel Modules exer IM Ra Seen EIER 1 4 14 4 Module Adapters cele Ere etre ana e bte etate de sse metn 1 4 1 4 5 Power S pplles oed rU e IERI vate dees RREREAU C wand cede a EAA AN 1 4 1 5 CM 5RB User Interface oeste ERR ET ogee Sede eas Praga us ce eee 1 7 1 5 1 Function Groups and Configuration Switches
174. ion returns to the primary line after a user programmable delay at the conclusion of the primary line failure You can program this delay to e 10 seconds e 1 minute e 5 minutes Reversion to the primary line only occurs if the primary is in Good condition or in better condition than the backup If you select non revertive switching operation returns to the primary line if manually forced via the front panel switches by using ISiCL commands or if the primary line becomes better than the backup line Tables 2 5 and 2 6 Figure 2 10 shows T1 signal flow after a line switch operation to the backup line In this state both transmit and receive T1 traffic flows through the backup CM Harris Corporation 2 15 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 2 Functional Description Version 2 11 August 2011 2 1 4 9 CM 5RTD Time Delay Common Modules You can remotely control the delay feature on the redundant CM 5R TD common module However there are a few additional requirements for configuration of redundant time delay common modules The time delay function TDLY in the basic menu group and the time delay parameter Topt in the advanced menu group must be configured identically on all CM 5R TD configurations Also the SCB address 1 36 of each CM 5R TD must be unique Section 4 7 Integrated Time Delay has additional details on the time delay option 2 1 4 10 Line Failur
175. ips 6 4 1 Terminal Multiplexer Testing Use this procedure to check out a terminal multiplexer ACS 163 or ACS 167 or for each CM 5RB module on a dual multiplexer ACS 166 or ACS 169 This procedure assumes that the multiplexer is already installed wired and powered but is not yet in service If you are using a redundant CM 5RB module remove the inactive module for this test 1 To verify that the CM 5RB module is in the TERM mode perform these steps a Remove the active CM 5RB module for a few seconds b Re insert it C Observe whether the active module displays TERM If it does go to Step 2 If it does not check and if necessary correct the mode switch settings on the MA 215 module adapter at the rear of the shelf Section 4 2 CM 5RB Basic Configuration Group Menu 2 To set the CM 5RB transmitter timing to use its internal timing oscillator for testing perform these steps a Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display shows TIME b Press down on the SET NEXT switch several times until the display shows INT C If the green top light next to the display turns on timing is already set to internal Proceed to Step 3 d If the green light does not turn on press up on the SET NEXT switch twice to change the timing setting to internal The green light should now be on 3 To verify that T1 frame format and line code are set correctly for the T1 service available perform these steps Note Al
176. isenana Eaa SIE NER REL EX AA RARE CERRAR ROS SEU UE EE RE ENTE 2 24 Extended Superframe ESF Format cccccccecsceee esses sneer ee eeeeeeeteeeeeeneeteateeeneeneanaes 2 24 AMI Line Coding iso e Ee DR bela ae lee ee eA 2 25 Original Payload with Eight Consecutive Zeroes ece cece eee eee eee e eae e ee ee ees 2 25 B8ZS Zero Substitution Line Coding sss mmn 2 26 Single Terminal Multiplexer Configuration ssssssssseee mmm 2 26 Dual Terminal Multiplexer Configuration ssssssseee meme 2 27 Point to Point System 0 0 0 cece eee ener eee nena nn nn 2 27 Drop and Insert Multiplexer Configuration ssesssssseee ne 2 28 ACS 165 Drop and Insert System sssssssssssssss eee meme ene 2 29 Top View of Redundancy Modules and Paired Line Redundancy Adapters 3 3 ACS 163 Multiplexer Front View with Redundant Common Modules sss 3 3 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products Table of Contents Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5
177. it makes for easier maintenance Each channel module within a given multiplexer must of course be assigned a different number Valid channel module numbers are the integers from 1 to 36 The individual channel module manuals give details on setting the card address For terminal multiplexers using redundant CM 5RB modules the primary CM 5RB module is accessed using the ISiCL sub address TERM and the backup is accessed using the ISiCL sub address BTERM In a drop and insert multiplexer only the DI A module accepts and processes commands targeted for channel modules that is commands with a sub address of the form Cn where n is a number from 1 to 36 Therefore when using either a local controller or a remote controller to perform channel module operations on a drop and insert multiplexer always establish the connection through the remote port on the DI A module In the case where both CM 5B modules of a drop and insert multiplexer are connected to a controller via a data network the multiplexer s DI A module automatically processes commands issued with the proper multiplexer address and channel module sub address and the DI B module ignores the commands 5 20 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Command Field The third field in the ISiCL command line is the command field There are six ISiCL commands SET
178. it responds in this way to a STATUS command issued to its TERM or DI A module OK SHELF NORMAL This response indicates all of these conditions e No power timing or T1 alarms or alerts are detected e The ACO switch is not on e No channel module on either the main or expansion shelf if provided is in an alarm or alert state This SHELF NORMAL response may also include the line RECEIVING ALL ONES if the far end multiplexer is idle If however the queried multiplexer is in an alarm or alert state it generates a response with this format OK gt gt gt ALARM or ALERT AT SHELF lt lt message describing the alarm or alert condition s Note that the OK in the first line of the response indicates that the received command was valid not that the multiplexer is all right For example if a STATUS command is issued to a CM 5RB module that is receiving a T1 Yellow Alarm signal it responds OK gt gt gt ALERT AT SHELF lt RECEIVING YELLOW ALARM Or if a STATUS command is issued to the TERM or DI A module in an ACS 160 Series multiplexer in which the channel module with sub address 5 is in an alarm state it responds 40K gt gt gt ALERT AT SHELF lt lt lt ALARM AT C05 If more than one channel module is in an alert or alarm state the message gives the total number of modules having problems rather than their i
179. jacks Mon GROUP switch Function display ON OFF SET NEXT switch TX OUT RX IN YEL ERR BPV FRM AIS LOOP Timing INT EXT LPBK CPU CM 5RB Module Indicator TX OUT RX IN ERR YEL BPV AIS FRM INT LPBK CPU NORMAL ALERT ALARM Patch Cord Loopback ON BLINKS OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF EqLB Loopback ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF The RX IN light blinks to indicate detection of an all ones signal With an internal EqLB loopback active no signal reaches the T1 receiver 6 10 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 The LPBK and ALERT lights only turn on when an internal loopback is activated not when an external loopback is created 6 4 2 Drop and Insert Multiplexer Testing For a typical three site drop insert system terminal at Location 1 drop and insert multiplexer at Location 2 and terminal at Location 3 test in this order 1 Test the terminal at Location 1 first 2 Use the procedure to test the drop insert multiplexer at Location 2 3 Test the terminal at Location 3 In this procedure DI A refers to the CM 5RB module in physical slot 1 terminating the T1 line between Locations 1 and 2 and DI B refers to the CM 5RB module in slot 2 terminating the T1 line between Loca
180. kplane Connector s Standard for specific Power supply modules do not connector interface require module adapters to mate in backplane Figure 2 14 Module and Module Adapter Insertion in 3RU Side or 1RU Chassis Top For some channel modules one specific module adapter must be used to provide the correct connector s Other channel modules are compatible with several different module adapters each providing a different interface Each individual channel module manual describes the module adapter s available for that module Warning Hot insertion or removal of a module adapter while a channel module is in place is not recommended as it could damage the channel module or the module adapter To remove a module adapter while the system is turned on has power first remove the associated channel module Similarly to install a new channel module first install the module adapter and then install the module itself 2 22 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 2 Functional Description ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 2 2 System Functionality 2 2 1 T1 Digital Transmission A single T1 circuit provides twenty four full duplex 64 kbps time slots to carry payload data for an aggregate payload capacity of 1 536 Mbps in each direction 24 x 64 1536 An 8 kbps overhead channel brings the actual T1 interface rate to 1 544 Mbps Section 2 2 1 1 Intraple
181. kup CM module takes control of the MA 215 module adapter A signal generated from the module adapter takes the failed primary CM off the multiplexer bus In a drop and insert multiplexer the primary CM 5RB module in the DI A mode holds the channel module configuration information the DI B CM 5RB module does not hold this information The DI A CM 5RB module queries the DI B CM 5RB status and reports it to the DI B backup CM 5RB module Figure 2 7 The DI B backup CM 5RB module then takes appropriate action Since DI B CM 5RB Harris Corporation 2 9 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 2 Functional Description Version 2 11 August 2011 modules do not hold channel module configuration information the switchover from a backup DI B CM 5RB module to a primary one is fixed at two seconds CD A CM 5RB checks the DI B primary Backup Primary CM 5RB status Primary Backup CM 5RB CM 5RB CM 5RB CM 5RB Primary DI A CM 5RB reports Backup DI B CM 5RB takes the DI B primary CM 5RB status control of DI B if the DI A to the DI B backup CM 5RB CM 5RB reports a failure of the DI B primary CM 5RB Figure 2 7 Redundant CM 5RB Functions in Drop and Insert Multiplexer 2 1 4 2 Switch from Backup to Primary CM 5RB Module In revert RVRT configuration the backup CM 5RB module automatically reverts control back to the primary CM 5RB module when it detects that a hardware failure has been cor
182. le assume that you have a point to point system with one program audio receiver module in the shelf at your location at Site A and two program audio transmitter modules in the shelf at Site B Figure 5 16 Each transmitter module is receiving as its analog input program feed 1 and program feed 2 a 15 kHz stereo program audio signal The two transmitter modules and the receiver module are all set to Time Slots 15 16 17 and 18 The shelf at Site B is connected via phone line and modem to your terminal Its password is GREEN At Site B one transmitter module is set to card address 12 and the other is set to card address 13 The module at address 12 is currently active which means that program feed 1 is being transmitted to site A However you wish to switch over to transmitting program feed 2 5 34 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Site B ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series Multiplexer Program Program Feed 1 Feed 2 Transmit Transmit T1 Public Network A P Network P di 7 ACS 160 Series T1 STL 160 Series Multiplexer Site A Program Receive Figure 5 16 Turning Modules On and Off with Remote Control First type the command UNLOCK GREEN The system acknowledges the command with this response OK The remote port is n
183. lerance to transmission errors 17 5 ms for ESF 4 0 ms for SF Mean time to lose frame at 10 3 Bit Error Rate Greater than 10 hours for ESF Greater than 2 hours for SF Greater than 2000 bit error burst for ESF and SF 3 dB to 6 dB relative to the nominal DSX 1 level Greater than 28 UI at 10 Hz exceeds AT amp T PUB 62411 for terminals Greater than 20 dB at 50 Hz exceeds AT amp T PUB 62411 RJ 48C on the MA 215 module adapter DB 15P on the MA 217B module adapter 7 1 ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 7 Specifications Version 2 11 August 2011 Primary Timing Internal 1 544 MHz 30 ppm Loop 1 544 MHz 50 ppm External 1 544 MHz 50 ppm from T1 station clock or optional 8 kHz x N clock N 1 to 192 with RS 422 input Through 1 544 MHz x 50 ppm for drop insert operation Timing Fallback Timing Automatically enabled in case of primary timing failure Smooth phase transition to fallback timing minimizes down line perturbations Timing Output 1 544 Mbps RS 422 timing output to synchronize other equipment Connector RJ 11s on the MA 215 MA 217B MA 235 1 MA 235 2 MA 216 module adapters Alphanumeric Four character alphanumeric display of T1 setup timing and link status Display with a bi level indicator light signifying on off status of displayed function Indicator Lights Power on Normal Alert Alarm Transmit output Receive input Errors Bipolar variations Out of
184. lexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 Ele Edit Setup View Help osa rs i Z Nel oo CM 5RB_1 BTERM Backup Alias Name E Address Card Address OO CM 5RB_1 TERM Primary OM5PE 1 E E Card Type CM 5RB Description T1 CSU Common Module General Redundancy T1 Framing Format T1 Line Code e Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution C Superframe C Alternate Mark Inversion Primary Timing Mode a en Enable T1 Line Loopback Enable T1 Payload Loopback C External Term only deaths puces us Enable TI Equipment Loopback Clear Statistics Loop Term only Figure 5 11 CM 5RB Configuration Screen The status page shows the current CM 5RB condition Figure 5 12 This page generates the same report as the manually entered ISiCL commands that Section 5 2 3 1 ISiCL Command Line Format discusses File Edit Setup view Help olea oe ESRB STERM Backup Alias Name Comm Port Address Card Address SRB_2 TERM Primary CM 5RB_2 COM1 2 TERM Card Type CM 5RB Description T1 CSU Common Module Status csu Statistics Remote Statistics ATT Statistics Reaisters r Active Line p Line Switch Cause Primary Line Failure Line Condition Module Failure BER Threshold Exceeded Backup Manual Switch Active Module p Module Switch Cause p Firmware Version Primary Module Failure V606 Line
185. lf sssssssssssssee memes 6 2 Figure 6 3 Y Series Power Supply Front View sssssssssssseeeme Hmmm meses seen nennen 6 3 Figure 6 4 T1 LoopbackS s 3o ne tH eae ees Gp ego epu ene a De oat ees 6 4 Figure 6 5 T1 Test JACKS 3c e x oer Rr Pere Re rn pind nee e me rer Red eras epe Pet ET 6 13 Figure 6 6 T1 Circuit In Service Monitoring cece mmm eres 6 14 Figure 6 7 T1 Circuit Out of Service Testing ssssssssrsssstrrssrnttt tirn eene meme ene 6 15 Figure 6 8 Data Channel Testing on In Service T1 System ssssssssssseeemememem 6 16 Figure 6 9 Voice or Audio Channel on In Service T1 SySt M cece teeter eerie 6 16 Figure 6 10 Channel Module Testing with Local T1 Loopback or Out of Service T1 System 6 17 Figure 6 11 Basic Trouble Categories sssssssssssssss nemen eee nena 6 18 Figure 6 12 Y Series Power Supplies Front View sessssseen memes 6 20 Figure A 1 P Codes Used to Change Buffer Depth Delay Time ssssssememHHH A 4 Figure A 2 RS 422 Control Port Information Bytes sssssssssssse eene een A 5 Tables Table 1 1 CM 5RB and Power Supply Status Indicator Lights sssessssessesssse 1 10 Table 2 1 CM 5RB Indicator Lights ssssssssssssssn mmm me nennen 2 8 Table 2 2 Interoperability Chart ssssssssssssssssse mmm mensem nehmen 2 11 Table 2 3 Line Failure COnditions cccccccccc
186. lf Redundancy Mode Status ISiCL STATUS Error Message Description Note The next status conditions can only be generated if these conditions are all true FTI mode from the advanced front panel select CUST gt FTI and ESF Extended Superframe Framing Primary Backup NORMAL RECEIVE 86 ERRORED SECS IN 24 HOURS Eighty six or more errored seconds in a 24 hour window has occurred Note Errored Second ES is defined in ATT 54016 Primary Backup NORMAL RECEIVE 5 ERRORED SECS IN 15 MINUTES Five or more errored seconds in a 15 minute window has occurred Note Errored Second ES is defined in ATT 54016 Primary Backup NORMAL RECEIVE 2 ERRORED SECS IN 15 MINUTES Two or more errored seconds in a 15 minute window has occurred Note Errored Second ES is defined in ATT 54016 After a module switch occurs due to a failed module or after a module reversion switch occurs due to replacement of a failed module with a good module an ISiCL channel module status query may be responded to with a WAIT SCANNING CHANNEL MODULES response During a module switchover the common module has an incomplete channel module status database The common module reacquires this database This process may take a second or two to complete During this time the ISiCL WAIT response is generated ISiCL channel module configuration is not affected during a module switchover After a module switch occurs due to an inactive module the channel module ISiCL
187. llation amp Operation Version 2 1 August 2011 Section 6 zg Testing amp Troubleshooting SEPP 6 1 6 1 Recommended Tools amp Equipment ccc eee eee eee eee ee eee ee teeta 6 1 6 2 T1 Multiplexer Monitor amp Control Features cc cceeeee cece eee eee ee teenies 6 1 6 3 Diagnostic FUNCTIONS sies Rp tag aE ETA EEANN E a 6 3 6 3 1 T1 Loopback Use LPBK Group cccccceeceee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeaeeaeeaeeaes 6 3 6 3 2 Blinking Indicator Lights BLNK Group csssssm IH 6 5 6 3 3 Performance Data Review RVU1 Group cccecceceee eee eee mme 6 6 6 3 4 Other Diagnostic Data DIAG Group cece ecc eee e eee mme 6 7 06 3 5 Alerts and Alarms x eee yea ERR vee eae een tu ER reed aki 6 7 6 4 System Check Out Procedures sssssssessssseeeeeemmeeee 6 9 6 4 1 Terminal Multiplexer Testing ssssssssssssm mme 6 9 6 4 2 Drop and Insert Multiplexer Testing cssssssssm mm 6 11 6 5 Test Equipment Use with T1 Multiplexer System sess 6 13 6 5 1 T1 Test aCKS oce ioci tree e ete ated uted eve E EXER RA LEX E TR VAR TER NATO 6 13 6 5 2 T1 Test Equipment Use with In Service Tests sss 6 14 6 5 3 T1 Test Equipment Use with Out of Service Tests sese 6 15 6 5 4 Analog or Data Test Equipment Use with Channel Tests sssssss 6 16 6 6 Tro bleshooLlng x iuo coo o Eos eerie Hee ees oe eae 6 1
188. loopback Deactivate the equipment loopback WARNING Do not activate the payload and equipment loopbacks simultaneously When the control circuit is carried as a channel on the T1 circuit never command the far end multiplexer to initiate an equipment loopback You cannot turn this loopback off by remote control CH ALM Selects alarms from the channel card SCB addresses that can generate a shelf alarm RESET Resets the CM 5RB module to factory defaults ALL NONE 1 to 36 DFLT All SCB addresses reporting an alarm condition are logically sent to the shelf alarm No SCB addresses reporting an alarm condition are sent to the shelf alarm The SCB address 1 36 are sent to the shelf alarm Any subsequent SCB address number are also sent to the shelf alarm These are the default settings FRAMING ESF CODE B8ZS PTIME INT on terminal multiplexers PTIME THRU on drop and insert multiplexers LINE LB OFF PAYLD LB OFF EQPT LB OFF CH ALM ALL All other CM 5RB parameters are not affected by a RESET command Table 5 9 shows the ISiCL SET parameters that support CM 5RB combined line and module redundancy 5 28 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Table 5 9 I SiCL SET Parameters param Legal lt value gt s MRDN NRVRT RVRT 9 OFF fs Jg 2 E wn 2 Jg fei xe 5
189. ly for redundancy If the main supply fails the system uses the redundant supply to continue operating Simply insert the second power supply into the redundant supply slot on the front indicator light turns on exactly as those on the main supply Due to space limitations 1RU shelves do not have the capacity for redundant power supplies Power supply modules require no special setup As long as they are plugged into their respective slots and system power is applied they operate normally If a 3RU shelf is equipped with two power supplies main and redundant and one of the supplies fails it may be removed and a new supply inserted without turning off the system 3 4 Redundant CM 5RB Modules 3 4 1 Redundant CM 5RB Installation The CM 5RB redundancy feature can be used with the MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 module adapters A multiplexer equipped with redundant CM 5RB modules automatically switches from the primary module over to the backup module when it detects a line or hardware failure When the line or hardware failure is repaired the backup CM 5RB module can revert automatically or manually to the primary CM 5RB module Install the primary CM 5RB module in the same slot number as the MA 235 1 module adapter Install the backup CM 5RB module in the slot adjacent to the primary module and connect it to the MA 235 2 module adapter Redundant CM 5RB modules do not function with CM 5 common modules CM 5RB or CM 5R TD modules have a version o
190. ly until the desired function is displayed The bi level light to the right of the function display indicates the status of the currently displayed function If the top green light is on this function is active If the bottom red light is on the function is not active Set CM 5RB Functions To turn on a function that is not currently active press up twice on the SET NEXT switch while that function is on the display Pressing up once causes the top green light to blink indicating that a setup change takes place if the SET NEXT switch is pressed up again Actually pressing up on the SET NEXT switch a second time causes the top green light to turn on continuously indicating that the selected setup parameter has been changed to the currently displayed setting If a function is already active pressing up on the SET NEXT switch again causes no status or setup changes For example if the display shows ESF while frame format is set to SF the red light is on Pressing up on the SET NEXT switch once causes the top green light to blink Pressing up on the SET NEXT switch a second time actually changes the current T1 framing format from SF to ESF the red light turns off and the green light is on continuously It is important to note that some setup functions are mutually exclusive setting one function automatically deactivates another Examples include e Line code you can set line code to AMI or B8ZS but not both e Frame format yo
191. modules These module adapters are implemented separately to allow replacement of a failed adapter without interruption of service The MA 235 1 adapter is the primary module adapter and the MA 235 2 adapter is the backup module adapter in line redundancy applications Each has an RJ 48 T1 interface with CSU protection The combined module adapters bridge timing in and serial I O connectors to both common modules A single timing out connector is provided and is connected to the currently active common module Timing in and timing out signals are transmitted on separate RJ 11 connectors In the event that a common module failure occurs during operation you can remove and replace the CM 5RB common module without interruption of service Before installing a replacement for the primary CM 5RB module you should pre configure the line interface settings of the CM 5RB module by installing the module in an unused card slot and using the front panel switch to set e Framing type e Line code e Transmit line build out The unlikely event of the MA 235 1 or MA 235 2 failure is treated like a line failure in that module and line switching occur As long as T1 data is not flowing between the module adapters most likely caused by a module only switch due to module adapter failure you can hot swap either one of the line redundant module adapters without disturbing traffic through the adjacent adapter Hot swapping in this manner requires removing the external s
192. mote Port PC or Terminal ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series Multiplexer Remote Port Figure 5 3 SCM IP Connection on Remote Network Management Systems 5 2 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 5 1 1 1 Network Address ADDR Group Setting Note These sections contain procedures that include using the GROUP and SET NEXT switches If you are not already familiar with these switches review Section 1 5 CM 5RB User Interface before proceeding Each CM 5RB module can be assigned a four digit network address that is a number from 0001 to 9999 Network addresses distinguish the multiplexers connected via a common network to a central controller The central controller can be a human operator using a terminal or a PC or with a basic communications program or when available a computerized network management system which is compatible with the ACS 160 Series multiplexers In such a network all ACS 160 Series multiplexers may receive every command issued by the central controller Including the target multiplexer s network address in the command format ensures that only the target multiplexer responds to that command The network address is an optional setting If the remote access feature is not used or if a terminal is connected directly to a single CM 5RB module it is not
193. must include a valid parameter name followed by an equal sign followed by a valid parameter value For example to activate the payload loopback in a terminal multiplexer with an address of 17 issue the command 17 TERM SET PAYLD LB ON Section 5 4 5 Change Common Module Setup Parameters lists the valid parameter names and values for SET commands issued to CM 5RB modules You can also issue SET commands to remotely controllable channel modules Each channel module type has its own valid parameter names and values listed in the individual channel module manuals Comment Field The ISiCL command line format also allows a free form comment to be included after the command between the semicolon and the carriage return For example 3 TERM SET PTIME EXT Sets MUX 3 primary timing to external Anything typed in the comment field that is anything after the semicolon but before the carriage return is ignored by the multiplexer Comments may be used when ISiCL commands are embedded in batch files or data files accessed by an automated controller to make the commands more readable later The comment field is always optional 5 22 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Allowable Characters ISiCL command line fields might contain Valid addresses Sub addresses Commands Parameters
194. n Table 3 7 MA 235 2 Switch 1 Functions and Settings Factory Positions Default Description 1 and2 On Operating Mode TERM SW 1 Position 1 and Position 2 both On DI A SW 1 Position 1 On and Position 2 Off DI B SW 1 Position 1 Off and Position 2 On SPARE SW 1 Position 1 and Position 2 both Off 3 On Not used 4 and 5 On This switch position controls the bias of the RS 485 portion of the remote port used for daisy chaining remote ports For normal operation Switch 1 Position 4 and 5 should both be set in the On bias position When using a daisy chain configuration two module adapters in the chain should have these switches On and the others should be Off Note that Positions 4 5 6 should be set as a group that is all On or all Off 6 On Switch 1 Position 6 controls the termination impedance 120 ohms for the RS 485 portion of the remote port This Switch 1 Position 6 should be set in the On position When daisy chaining the last multiplexer in the chain should have this switch on and the others should be Off Note that Positions 4 5 6 should be set as a group that is all On or all Off Harris Corporation 3 9 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 3 Installation amp Wiring Version 2 11 August 2011 The MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 module adapter pair is connected by an external shielded cable and are designed to operate in line redundancy with a pair of CM 5RB
195. n still read the setting from the channel modules but you cannot make changes to the programmable module settings Click the Start on the taskbar 4 Click Programs I ntraGuide On the menu bar click Setup Communication Interface Configure Serial Port The Communication Settings dialog box appears 6 Usethis dialog box to view edit add or remove configurations as needed 7 Click Setup Auto Detect Devices to allow the software to go online with the equipment and build an equipment list 8 Follow the prompts to detect the channel modules Note To see the latest list of IntraGuide compatible modules in the IntraGuide Help go to Help Help Topics on the menu bar click Common Modules and Channel Modules on the Contents tab and then click List of Common Modules and Channel Modules 5 2 1 3 IntraGuide Help The IntraGuide Help tool covers both IntraGuide software and Intraplex equipment The Help is also context sensitive and is designed to give you with all information required to use IntraGuide software Click Help on the IntraGuide menu bar to open the Help tool 5 2 1 4 Sample Configurations Using I ntraGuide IntraGuide can control the functionality of most modules The IntraGuide Help provides context sensitive information about operating the IntraGuide interface Figure 5 11 shows the CM 5RB configuration interface Harris Corporation 5 15 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multip
196. n Group Menu For STL alarms an incoming AIS is an alarm not an alert but a TXOUT alarm T1 transmitter fail is an alert not an alarm The CM 5RB module has a fixed BER alarm threshold of 10 as measured over a one second interval When the STL alarms are enabled ISiCL can indicate a bit error alarm condition when responding to the STATUS command RECEIVING 10 3 BIT ERROR RATE To enable the STL alarms perform these steps 1 Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch As the display changes to read DIAG hold the switch down do not release it 2 While holding the GROUP switch down the display must still read DIAG press up once on the SET NEXT switch The display changes to read FTIM 3 Release both switches You are now in the Advanced Configuration Group Note Although you can cycle through the CM 5RB groups by pressing repeatedly either up or down on the GROUP switch you can only enter the advanced configuration group by pressing down on the switch while the display cycles from RVU1 to DIAG Press on the GROUP switch again to exit the Advanced Configuration Group 4 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch until the display reads CUST which is underscored to indicate an additional subgroup Press up once on the SET NEXT switch to display Std which is the first of three CUST options 6 Press down once on the SET NEXT switch to display STL 7 Press up twice on the SET NEXT switch Af
197. n an expansion shelf set the address of each channel module to its physical slot number plus 18 For example a channel module located in physical slot 4 of an expansion shelf should be assigned a card address of 22 Remote communication with channel modules located in ACS 165 drop and insert multiplexers can only take place through the remote port of the DI A CM 5RB module Channel module commands received by the DI B CM 5RB are ignored In a dual terminal multiplexer each CM 5RB module communicates only with the channel modules in its section of the multiplexer Each terminal operates independently of the other However an alert or alarm generated by either terminal creates an alert or alarm condition on the shelf 5 2 3 5 Channel Module Status To determine a given channel module s status in an ACS 160 Series multiplexer issue a STATUS command in this form lt Address gt Cn STATUS where n is the number of the target channel module For example to request the status of channel module 4 in multiplexer 15 issue the command 15 C4 STATUS The sub address field in channel module STATUS commands is always of the form Cn regardless of whether the module is located in a terminal or a drop and insert multiplexer The response to a valid channel module STATUS command indicates whether the module is in an alarm or alert state and may provide other information as well depending on the specific channel module type The response
198. n group use GROUP to display TDLY Press SET NEXT down to access the delay parameters TDSA time delay subaddress is displayed Press SET NEXT up to select TDSA The display shows the currently programmed address Press SET NEXT down to begin editing The underline indicates the digit to be edited Press SET NEXT up to change the first digit Press SET NEXT down to select the second digit press SET NEXT up to change its value el OY cou c Press SET NEXT down to enter the value The red On Off light is on to indicate that the value is not yet active 8 Press SET NEXT up twice to confirm and activate the new address 4 7 1 3 Local Control Set for On or Off To enable or disable local control of the delay feature perform these steps 1 On the basic function menu use GROUP to display TDLY 2 Press SET NEXT down to access the delay parameters 3 Press SET NEXT down again to display LCL local 4 Note which On Off indicator light is on If the green light is on local control is enabled If the red light is on local control is disabled and the delay feature can only be controlled remotely using ISiCL commands 5 Press SET NEXT up twice to toggle LCL on or off 4 7 2 Operation The CM 5RTD module has a set of indicator lights Table 4 10 located behind the TIMING indicators 4 20 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 4 Setup amp Configuration ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operati
199. nced Configuration Group perform these steps 1 Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch As the display changes to read DIAG hold the switch down do not release it 2 While holding the GROUP switch down the display must still read DIAG press up once on the SET NEXT switch The display changes to read FTIM 3 Release both switches You are now in the Advanced Configuration Group Note Although you can cycle through the CM 5RB groups by pressing repeatedly either up or down on the GROUP switch you can only enter the Advanced Configuration Group by pressing down on the switch while the display cycles from RVU1 to DIAG Pressing on the GROUP switch again to exit the Advanced Configuration Group 4 3 2 Display and Change Items in Advanced Configuration Group To display and change items in this group perform these steps 1 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch until the display shows the menu you want to change 2 Press up twice on the SET NEXT switch After the first press the green top light blinks indicating a change is about to be made After the second press it turns on continuously indicating the option you wanted to change is now enabled Some items are underscored to indicate an additional subgroup To enter and cycle through any subgroups perform these steps 1 Press up once on the SET NEXT switch to display the first of the subgroup options 2 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch to cycle t
200. nd ending with a semicolon e Address e Sub address e Command e Parameter An optional comment field then appears followed by a carriage return created by pressing the Enter key lt Address gt lt Subaddress gt lt Command gt lt Parameter Value gt comment if desired lt CR gt Filling in the comment field is always optional and the other four fields may sometimes be left blank However the three colons the semicolon and the carriage return must be present for the command to be recognized For example to set primary timing to EXTERNAL in a terminal multiplexer whose network address is 3 perform these steps 1 Type 3 TERM SET PTIME EXT 2 Press the Enter key on your terminal or PC keyboard In the example above 3 is the target multiplexer s address TERM is the sub address also referred to as the card address SET is the command PTIME is the parameter being set EXT is the desired parameter value Colons terminate the address sub address and command fields while a semicolon terminates the parameter field the last field in an ISiCL command line In the sample ISiCL commands in these sections the carriage return character Enter key required at the end of every ISiCL command line is not explicitly shown Remember however that in all cases ISiCL commands must end with a carriage return character hex OD When typing commands manually simply press the
201. ndividual sub addresses for example ALARM AT 3 CHANNEL CARDS Each type of channel module has its own set of conditions that cause it to enter an alarm or alert state Section 7 5 Channel Module Remote Access Harris Corporation 5 25 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 In an ACS 166 dual terminal multiplexer if an alert or alarm condition occurs on either terminal the shelf goes into its corresponding alarm state It is therefore possible for the shelf to register an alarm while one of its two terminals is still operating normally Table 5 7 defines all the alert and alarm messages that can appear in the CM 5RB response to a STATUS command Table 5 7 Alert and Alarm Messages Responding To STATUS Command Message REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY FAI LURE ALARM AT CNN ALARM AT N CHANNEL CARDS ALERT AT CNN ALERT AT N CHANNEL CARDS TRANSMITTER USING FTIME INT fallback timing TRANSMITTER CLOCK FREE RUNNING NO OUTPUT FROM TRANSMITTER RECEIVE SIGNAL LOSS EXCESS JITTER RECEIVER OUT OF FRAME OTHER SIDE DI B IS OUT OF FRAME OTHER SIDE DI A IS OUT OF FRAME RECEI VING ALL ONES RECEI VING YELLOW ALARM PAYLD LB ON payload loopback on Using loop timing for payload loopback LINE LB ON line loopback on EQPT LB ON equipment loopback on CONFLICT AT TIME SLOT n RECEIVING 10 3 B
202. ne switching criterion in FTI or non FTI modes If selected as line switching criteria BER and UAS result in an alarm or alert even if redundancy is disabled that is LRDN CNFG OFF or NOBK line redundancy configuration equals off or no backup 2 1 4 12 T1 Transmitter Timing In a terminal multiplexer the CM 5RB common module enables selecting a primary timing source e Loop e Internal e External In a drop and insert multiplexer primary timing is always set to through In the event of network or link problems causing a loss of primary timing an automatic carefully controlled changeover to fallback timing helps eliminate frame slips and maintain circuit availability The fallback timing source is factory preset to internal The T1 transmitter timing can be set up differently on the primary and backup module However during operation both the primary and the backup module operate from the same timing source which is the source specified for the currently active module On the inactive or standby common module the T1 transmit timing is automatically switched to the same T1 transmit timing as the active common The indicator lights for timing are not affected For example if you switch the inactive CM to loop timing all indicator lights Front Panel User Interface and ISiCL are not affected and indicate loop timing However the inactive CM the operates on the same timing as the active CM Section 4 4 1 gives details on setting primary
203. nfiguration mode TERM BTERM DI A or BDIA and module status e Identity of any CM 5RB module redundancy partner configuration mode TERM BTERM DI A or DI B and module status e List of channel modules found in the shelf including SCB address and type ID For example Command WHO cr carriage return Response OK FROM NET ADDRESS network address gt CM 5RB CONFIGURED AS TERM CM 5RB CONFIGURED AS BTERM FAILED CHANNEL CARD lt N1 gt YPE ID1 CHANNEL CARD lt N2 gt YPE lt ID2 gt CHANNEL CARD lt N3 gt YPE ID3 Where N is the card address and ID is card type identifier 5 2 3 4 Channel Module Remote Access You can set up and remotely monitor most channel modules available for use with ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series multiplexers Specifically you can issue these commands to channel modules by using a sub address of the form Cn where n is the card address of the target channel module e STATUS e CONFIG e SET Valid card addresses range from 1 to 36 As discussed earlier setting hardware switches on each channel module determines its card address In a 3RU shelf setting the card address of each channel module to its physical slot number 3 18 is 5 30 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 recommended
204. ngs 2 1 6 2 Channel Modules in Point to Point versus Point to Multipoint Circuits Most ACS 160 system circuits are point to point However you can configure several channel module types for point to multipoint operation For example you can set up a single program audio transmitter module and several program audio receiver modules in a point to multipoint or broadcast circuit configuration allowing multiple locations to receive the same program audio signal without the need for tandem decoding and re encoding at each receive site To achieve the point to multipoint configuration set all the receive modules to the same time slots as the transmit module Similarly data polling channel modules can be used to configure point to multipoint data circuits In this arrangement all the polling modules are set to use the same time slot but each responds only when it receives the Request To Send RTS signal Harris Corporation 2 21 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 2 Functional Description Version 2 11 August 2011 2 1 6 3 Relationship between Circuits and Time Slots The T1 circuit consists of twenty four 64 kbps time slots in each direction Section 2 2 1 T1 Digital Transmission Some channel module types use a single time slot to provide one or more circuits For example a single port data module may use one time slot to transmit one data circuit operating at 64 kbps wh
205. nit is bad Replace the module with a spare 3 Remove and reinsert the CM 5RB module once for each CM 5RB module on a dual terminal or a drop and insert multiplexer When the module is reinserted the alphanumeric display shows the CM 5RB mode TERM DI A or DI B for several seconds 6 18 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 f nothing appears on the display replace the CM 5RB module with a spare e fthe wrong mode appears correct the switch settings on the module adapter associated with the CM 5RB module Section 3 5 Module Adapters 4 Check that the TX OUT indicator light on the CM 5RB module is on If this light is off there is no transmit activity on the module Replace it with a spare 5 Check that the multiplexer is in frame has T1 frame synchronization When a multiplexer is in frame the CM 5RB FRM indicator light is off 6 If the FRM indicator light is on and the RX IN indicator light is off there is no receive activity In that case perform these steps a Check the cabling between the multiplexer and the T1 service provider b Check the equipment at the other end of the T1 circuit C Call your T1 carrier to verify that the T1 circuit is operating d If there is still no receive activity the CM 5RB module might be bad Replace it with a spare 7 f both the FRM and th
206. nterchangeable that is a CM 5RB module can be either a primary or a backup common module Figure 3 2 ACS 163 Multiplexer Front View with Redundant Common Modules Harris Corporation 3 3 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 3 Installation amp Wiring Version 2 11 August 2011 SIG BAT BAT BAT BAT BAT A B B ALARMS ALERT ALARM NO COM NC NO COM NC Connect with CA 202 Cable Assembly HULL Figure 3 3 ACS 163 Multiplexer Rear View with MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 Module Adapters oi e FOR USE WITH Y SERIES POWER SUPPLIES ONLY 3 4 2 1 Drop Insert Mode The addition of one or more drop and insert multiplexers converts a simple point to point system into a drop and insert system Data voice program audio and distribution multiple drop circuits can be established between any two locations in a T1 drop and insert system Drop and insert systems are not limited to a single drop and insert multiplexer and can in fact be used to link multiple locations To create a drop and insert multiplexer with full module and line redundancy features you need twp additional CM 5RB modules and a second set of MA 235 1 and MA 235 2 module adapters Place these CM 5RB pairs in slots 3 and 4 in the same orientation as the first set Then set the CM 5RB pairs to DI A or DI B per the system configuration Section 4 3 CM 5RB Advanc
207. ntical 2 26 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 2 Functional Description ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 ACS 166 Dual Terminal Multiplexer 1 544 Mbps 1 544 Mbps T1 circuit 1 T1 circuit 2 CM 5RB Twenty four 64 kbps time slots in each direction Twenty four 64 kbps time slots in each direction Channel modules for voice data audio transmit audio receive Payload circuits and other types Figure 2 22 Dual Terminal Multiplexer Configuration The two terminals are completely independent of each other in terms of data channels there is no drop and insert functionality and no time slots pass between the two However they share the same power supply and alarm system an alert or alarm condition on either of the two terminals causes the shelf to display ALERT or ALARM 2 2 3 Point to Point Systems The simplest type of ACS 160 system configuration is a point to point system two terminal multiplexers connected by a single T1 circuit Figure 2 23 The same payload circuits appear at both ends of a point to point system Location 1 Location 2 ACS 163 ACS 163 Terminal multiplexer Terminal multiplexer T1 circuit Voice 1 L Voice 1 Data 1 Data 1 Program Program Transmit Receive Voice 2 Voice 2 Data 2 Data 2 Figure 2 23 Point to Point System Most payload types such as voice and full duple
208. ntrol Table 5 22 describes the data in a CSU STAT and REMOTE STAT response Table 5 22 CSU STAT and REMOTE STAT Response Data 5 42 Data ELAPS TI ME DETEC TIME CRC 1 1 lt CRC lt 5 5 lt CRC lt 10 10 lt CRC lt 100 100 lt CRC lt 319 CRC gt 320 SEFE SEC FBE SEC Description Elapse Time The time the integrated CSU has been accumulating CSU line performance data Detection Time The time the integrated CSU has been successfully receiving REMOTE_STAT command or sending CSU_STAT command ANSI T1 403 compatible performance report messages from the remote device CRC error events The occurrence of a received CRC code that is not identical to the corresponding locally calculated code Severely errored framing event seconds The occurrence of two or more framing bit pattern errors within a 3 millisecond period Contiguous 3 millisecond intervals are examined and the 3 millisecond period may coincide with the ESF This framing error indicator while similar in form to criteria for declaring a terminal has lost framing is only designed as a performance indicator existing terminal out of frame criteria are the basis for terminal alarms Framing synchronization bit error seconds The occurrence of a frame bit error in the received frame bit pattern Typical Value When the local remote device is ANSI compliant DETEC TIME ELAPS TIME When the local remote device is neither ANSI or AT amp T compliant
209. ocated in the channel module manuals The two most common test scenarios are e Bench testing Two or more multiplexers are set up side by side on a test bench before the actual field installation e Field testing A system has been installed but is not yet in service or has been taken out of service for maintenance or repair Generally you can use the procedures in this section for both types of testing Differences between the two are noted where they occur While these procedures do not require remote control a laptop PC connected to the multiplexer s remote port can be helpful You can also use remote control to activate loopbacks in the far end multiplexer during field testing Section 5 Remote Control Operation gives details on using the remote interface 6 1 Recommended Tools amp Equipment Here is a list of the recommended equipment for testing and troubleshooting e Basic telecommunications installation tools screwdrivers wire stripper and so forth e Volt ohm meter VOM e T1 test set Basic ACS 160 Series test procedures do not require the use of a T1 test set However you might need T1 test sets in some instances such as to isolate an intermittent problem e Three conductor cable with bantam plugs on each end for access to the T1 test jacks on the CM 5RB module s You might have this cable or you might obtain it from a commercial source e Test equipment for the payload channels recommended equipment is list
210. ommands issued to a new CM 5RB module must be left blank null until its password is set Change Password subsection of Section 5 2 3 2 Examples null password 5555 TERM UNLOCK password GREEN 5555 TERM UNLOCK GREEN LOCK Locks the remote port of the addressed CM 5RB module When the module s remote port is locked it does not allow setup changes that is it does not accept SET commands Note that if the password is lost a module s remote port can still be unlocked locally The parameter field of a LOCK command should be left blank Example 4 DI B LOCK Table 5 6 shows the ISiCL commands for CM 5RB line module redundancy Table 5 6 ISiCL Commands Command ISiCL Command Description MPRI M Manually generate a switch to the primary module MBACK Manually generate a switch to the backup module LPRIM Manually generate a switch to the primary line LBACK Manually generate a switch to the backup line Parameter Field The fourth field in an ISIiCL command line is the parameter field As noted above the parameter field should be left blank for STATUS CONFIG and LOCK commands For UNLOCK commands the parameter field must contain the correct password of the addressed multiplexer For example to unlock the remote port on the DI A module in an ACS 165 multiplexer with an address of 12 and a password of GREEN issue the command 12 DI A UNLOCK GREEN For SET commands the parameter field
211. on Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 4 10 CM 5RTD Indicator Lights Indicator Description BUF Buffer This yellow light turns on when the delay buffer overflows or underflows indicating that the input clock frequency is going outside the PLL lock range LOCK This green light turns on when the actual delay is identical to the configured delay SRVC This green light turns on when the delay functionality is activated The delay setting is determined by the number of bits used in the buffer The buffer depth can range from 6 bits to 131 076 bits Each T1 1 544 Mbps bit has a duration of 647 67 nanoseconds nS allowing you to set a delay time ranging from 3 89 microseconds to 84 00 milliseconds The delay is set by sending a 17 bit binary number to the CM 5RTD module which takes this number adds five to it and uses the result to set the buffer depth in bits The 17 bit number can be sent to the CM 5RTD module in two ways through the RS 232 serial remote port using ISiCL P codes Appendix A gives detailed instructions for remotely configuring the CM 5RTD module Warning Valid numbers are binary 00000000000000001 through 11111111111111111 1 through 131 071 decimal Do not send all zeroes 4 8 CM 5RB Module amp Line Redundancy MRDN amp LRDN Groups The CM 5RB front panel user interface has two new groups for configuring redundancy operation The MRDN group sets up module redundancy and the LRDN group sets up line redundancy
212. onds and CRC 6 severely errored seconds to determine overall facility performance e Check the CM 5RB CSU statistics Section 5 2 3 10 for cyclic redundancy check CRC error events or other error conditions e On systems using the SF frame format frame bit error counts can be used to detect the presence of a high bit error rate or a severe error burst However frame bit error monitoring cannot usually identify problems causing very low error rates e Check with your service provider to determine what level of error performance is guaranteed on your T1 circuit Compare that level with your actual test results 6 14 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 6 5 3 T1 Test Equipment Use with Out of Service Tests This section describes the use of T1 test equipment to test T1 facilities on an out of service basis The tests described in this section can only be performed when you have access to a full end to end T1 circuit If you have fractional T1 service you cannot perform these tests For compatibility with all carrier networks the test equipment must be capable of generating framed T1 signals If possible use a QRSS quasi random signal source test pattern Your test set manual gives setup requirements Figure 6 7 shows that out of service tests you can perform by plugging a test set into the T1 circuit at lo
213. ons to remain functional by completing a DSO loop while a personal computer can be directly connected to the bridged CM 5RB module for Intraplex Simple Command Language ISiCL commands Warning A bridged CM 5RB module cannot communicate in a network Figure 5 4 Harris Corporation 5 7 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 ISiCL works in a command response mode where the CM 5RB module generates messages only in response to ISiCL commands from an external controller If CM 5RB communications configuration CNFG is set to OFF DSO management communications cannot be completed through the module If a CM 5RB CNFG is set to SLV a computer cannot be connected for ISiCL commands Figure 5 4 All CM 5RB modules within a network must have identical data rates and time slot settings to communicate with each other Time Time Slot 24 Slot 24 RS 232 CM 5RB T Circuit CM 5RB CM 5RB T1 Circuit Master DI A Slave DI B Slave D I Multiplexer Time Time Slot 24 Slot 24 CM 5RB T Circuit CM 5RB CM 5RB T1 Circuit M 5RB RS 232 Master DI A Slave DI B Slave Bridge D I Multiplexer Time Time Slot 24 Slot 24 EN CM 5RB T1 Circuit CM 5RB CM 5RB T1 Circuit CM 5RB RS 232 Master DI A Slave DI B Slave Off D I Multiplex
214. ontrol Version 2 11 August 2011 Sub address Field and Default Sub address The second field in an ISiCL command line is the card address or sub address field This field identifies specific common and channel modules within a given ACS 160 Series multiplexer Table 5 4 shows valid ACS 160 Series multiplexer sub addresses In a drop and insert multiplexer only the DI A module accepts and processes commands targeted for channel modules commands with a sub address of the form Cn where n is a number from 1 to 36 Therefore when using either a local controller or a remote controller to perform channel module operations on a drop and insert multiplexer always establish the connection through the remote port on the DI A module In the case where both CM 5RB modules of a drop and insert multiplexer are connected to a controller via a data network commands issued with the proper multiplexer address and channel module sub address are automatically processed by the multiplexer s DI A module and ignored by its DI B module In an ACS 166 dual terminal multiplexer each of the two CM 5RB modules accepts and processes commands for its associated channel module Each CM 5RB module must be given a different network address if the multiplexer is connected to a data network controller If the sub address field is left blank the default sub address is TERM This feature is convenient for addressing the CM 5RB module in a terminal multiplexer The default cann
215. ot be used with a drop and insert multiplexer When using the default the colon terminating the sub address field must still be present For example this command uses the default sub address to send a configuration inquiry to a terminal multiplexer CONFIG Table 5 4 Sub address Field Entries Sub address Description TERM Use this sub address in commands issued to the CM 5RB module in a terminal multiplexer In an ACS 166 dual terminal multiplexer both CM 5RB modules have the sub address TERM Use the multiplexer address to differentiate between them if they are both connected to the same network controller DI A Use this sub address in commands issued to the CM 5RB module configured to operate in the DI A mode in drop and insert multiplexers DI B Use this sub address in commands issued to the CM 5RB module configured to operate in the DI B mode in drop and insert multiplexers Cn Use this sub address format in commands sent to remotely controllable channel modules n 1 2 36 Note that n is the sub address number or card address of the target channel module within the multiplexer This sub address should not be confused with the multiplexer s network address Channel module addresses are set using switches on the channel modules themselves The card address is generally set to the same number as the physical slot the module occupies or in an expansion shelf to that number plus 18 This convention is not required but
216. oup RED not selected GREEN selected Loop timing of T1 link Only displays if the CM 5RB module is in TERM mode Internal timing of T1 link Only displays if the CM 5RB module is in TERM mode External timing of T1 link Only displays if the CM 5RB module is in TERM mode Through timing of the T1 link Only displays if the CM 5RB module is in DI A or DI B mode 4 3 ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 4 Setup amp Configuration Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 4 1 CM 5RB Basic Configuration Group continued Group LPBK BLNK RVU1 DIAG ADDR TDLY 4 4 Selections LnLB PaLB EqLB Rx11 Tx11 TxYI RxYI FTIM NLLB NPLB Xsjt TxLk RxLk TxRx XsJt T1 or CSU X XX Fcty 0000 TDSA LCL Description Loopback modes Section 6 3 1 T1 Loopbacks Use LPBK Group Indicates line loopback mode RED not in line loopback mode GREEN in line loopback mode Indicates payload loopback mode RED not in payload loopback mode GREEN in payload loopback mode Indicates equipment loopback mode RED not in equipment loopback mode GREEN in equipment loopback mode Receiving all ones Section 6 3 2 Blinking Indicator Lights BLNK Group Transmitting all ones keep alive circuit or AIS Transmitting yellow alarm Receiving yellow alarm Fall back timing Network requested line loopback Network requested payload loopback Ex
217. oup 6 4 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 2 Press down on the SET NEXT switch one or more times to display the desired loopback function The green top section of the bi level light next to the FUNCTION display turns on if the displayed loopback is active The red bottom section turns on if it is not 3 To change the state of the displayed loopback press up twice on the SET NEXT switch The bi level light changes state to indicate that the desired setup change has taken place This is a toggle type function If the displayed loopback is off pressing up twice on the SET NEXT switch turns it on If the displayed loopback is on pressing up twice on the SET NEXT switch turns it off 4 f you do not want to change the state of the displayed loopback press down on the SET NEXT switch to display a different loopback or press up or down on the GROUP switch to leave the LPBK group altogether 6 3 2 Blinking Indicator Lights BLNK Group The BLNK group gives messages that help explain what is happening when the receive input RX IN indicator lights or any of the CM 5RB timing indicator lights are blinking Table 6 3 For example if a CM 5RB receiver detects an all ones signal its RX IN indicator blinks and Rx11 appears in its BLNK group Messages appear in the BLNK group only when they are applicable
218. ow unlocked If you then type the command C12 CONFIG the system response appears in Table 5 15 Table 5 15 Explanation of CONFIG Response for Example 1 Response Meaning OK A valid query was received CHANNEL CARD 12 TYPE 202 Module SCB address 12 is a PT 153 module UNDER REMOTE CONTROL Set to remote control SRVC ON Service is on module is active P01 15 B00001111 First left channel time slot is set to 15 P02 16 B00010000 Second left channel time slot is set to 16 P03 17 B00010001 First right channel time slot is set to 17 P04 18 B00010010 Second right channel time slot is set to 18 POS 1 B00000001 Set to 15kHz bandwidth P06 1 B00000001 Both left and right channels are active P07 1 B00000001 Left channel is set to 15 bit coding P08 1 B00000001 Right channel is set to 15 bit coding P09 0 B00000000 Set for terminal or DI A operation P10 0 B00000000 The scrambler is off Harris Corporation 5 35 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 If you type C13 CONFIG the response from the system is the same except that line two reads CHANNEL CARD 13 TYPE 202 and line four reads SRVC OFF To make changes type C12 SET SRVC OFF You can verify that the change was successful by again typing C12 CONFIG The system responds
219. p Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Location 1 Analog or Data Test Set IN ACS 160 Series Multiplexer Equipment Jacks Other voice data and program circuits Manual loopback loopback patchcord Figure 6 10 Channel Module Testing with Local T1 Loopback or Out of Service T1 System Once a system is in service avoid using T1 loopbacks to test individual channels because the entire T1 circuit is out of service while the loopback is active 6 6 Troubleshooting This section presents a general approach to troubleshooting an ACS 160 Series system including e Basic guidelines e Typical troubleshooting procedure e Explanation of alerts and alarms generated by the ACS 160 Series multiplexer Figure 6 11 shows basic trouble categories ACS 160 system or channel trouble reported Setup errors T1 network problems ACS 160 equipment problems T1 transmit timing setting No signal or low level Power supply CM 5 common module Alarm indication signal AIS T1 signaling format T1 line code Bit errors Channel module Wiring or connector Excess iitter Channel module or wander setup Sensitivity to 1s density Figure 6 11 Basic Trouble Categories Harris Corporation 6 17 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting Version 2 11 August 2011 No procedure or guidelines however can cover all possible
220. p T TR54016 performance registers by issuing a REGISTERS command to its TERM DI A or DI B module Table 5 24 shows examples of REGISTERS commands for ACS 160 Series multiplexers Table 5 24 REGI STERS Command Model Command ACS 163 Terminal XADDRESS TERM REGISTERS ACS 165 A direction lt ADDRESS gt DI A REGISTERS ACS 165 B direction lt ADDRESS gt DI B REGISTERS Evaluate REGISTERS Responses The REGISTERS detect events every second and store data in 15 minute intervals There are 96 intervals 24 hours X 4 intervals per hour 96 intervals that record data The registers store the most recent 24 hours of data Here is a typical response to the REGISTERS Command OK INT ES UAS BES SES CSS LOF 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 1 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 1a 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 44 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control INT E 17 0 18 0 96 0 ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation UAS BES SES CSS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5 25 describes the data in a REGISTERS response Table 5 25 ATT STAT and REGI STERS Response Data Data Item MEASURE SECS VALID INTERVALS ERRORED SECS ES UNA
221. parameters e The GROUP and SET NEXT switches Afour character alphanumeric display for abbreviated group and function names A bi level indicator light set green on top red on bottom that shows whether the function displayed is currently active Harris Corporation 1 7 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 1 Introduction Version 2 11 August 2011 e Status Monitoring Twelve indicator lights appear on the right side for e T1 status e Primary timing status e Loopback activity e CPU activity T1 input Function SET NEXT Transmit test jacks 4 character switch timing display T1 output Grou ON OFF T1 status Loopback test jacks switc switch amp CPU Yellow BPV al NETWK MON EQUIP MON GROUP FUNCTION ON SET 5 s E z 5z T E 2 OFF NEXT Q uuo Qo T1 OUT T1 IN E TIMING Figure 1 16 CM 5RB Module Front View Note Because CM 5RB modules install vertically in 3RU shelves UP and DOWN on the toggle switches actually refer to right and left respectively in an ACS 163 ACS 165 ACS 166 STL 163 STL 165 or STL 166 multiplexer Figure 1 17 Figure 1 17 CM 5RB GROUP and SET NEXT Switches in 3RU Shelf 1 5 1 Function Groups and Configuration Switches The user accessible CM 5RB functions are organized into groups and include e Setup options such as SF and ESF frame formats e Current status conditions such as receiving all ones
222. ple ACS 160 Series systems can be frame synchronized by using a framed T1 signal generator and using a CM 5RTD common module with time delay on each multiplexer at the hub site Location 1 in Figure 3 10 The CM 5RTD module locks the frame generator of the common module to the external signal 4 16 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 4 Setup amp Configuration ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Location 1 Location 2 a 1 pe Frame Frame Generator Start Start Start Loop Timed 24 time 24 time 24 time slots slots slots Network Location 3 de Frame Frame rt Start Start Loop Timed 24 time 24 time 24 time slots slots slots Network Location 4 uM Frame Frame Start Start Start Loop r i Timed 24 time 24 time 24 time CM 5R slots slots slots TD gt 4 Network ACS 163 Figure 4 10 Multiple Frame Synchronized Systems 4 5 T1 Frame Format amp Line Code TSEL Group The T1 selection TSEL group is used to set the T1 frame format and line code Table 3 8 explains the functions available in the TSEL group Section 2 2 1 T1 Digital Transmission gives a detailed discussion of T1 frame formats and line codes 4 5 1 CSU Configuration The CM 5RB common module is designed for internal or external channel service unit CSU applications The CSU configuration must match your T1 carrier provider s
223. poration 4 1 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Int Default Ext Thru TLBO D SX Default 200 333 467 595 7dB 15dB AN SI Default exit ESF D efault AMI B8ZS Default PDE LPBK s PaLB EqLB BLNK I R xil TxII TxYI RxYI FTIM NLLB NPLB XsJt TxLk R xLk TxRx XsJt DIAG p Advanced Configuration Group T1 or CSU i X XX Fcty RVU 1 COMM 4 Setup amp Configuration BAUD Lock CNFG 74 OFF Default MSTR SLV BRDG RATE 8KB 16KB 32KB 64KB Redundant MEDN CM 5RB or CM 5RTD Oniy Section 4 6 REDN Group LRDN gives more information Figure 4 2 CM 5RB Basic Configuration Group Menu Structure 4 2 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 4 Setup amp Configuration ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 4 1 CM 5RB Basic Configuration Group Group Selections TSEL TLBO DSX default 200 333 467 595 7dB 15dB exit CSU Off ATT ANSI default exit SF ESF default AMI B8ZS default PDE TIME Loop Int default Ext Thru Harris Corporation Intraplex Products Description Sets the line build out range for the T1
224. port on the CM 5RB module The display shows the midpoint of the range Section 4 5 T1 Frame Format and Line Code TSEL Group RED not selected GREEN selected Sets build out for DSX standard 0 to 133 Sets build out for 133 to 266 Sets build out for 266 to 399 Sets build out for 399 to 533 Sets build out for 533 to 655 Network build out for 7 5 decibels Network build out for 15 decibels Exits TLBO and displays sub menu Channel Service Unit Sets the standard for the CM 5RB module s integrated CSU Section 4 5 1 CSU Configuration RED not selected GREEN selected Disables the integrated CSU for operation with an external CSU Sets the standard for the CM 5RB modules integrated CSU to AT amp T TR54016 compliant Sets the standard for the CM 5RB modules integrated CSU to ANSI T1 403 compliant Exits CSU and displays sub menu Sets the framing format to Superframe RED not selected GREEN selected Sets the framing format to Extended Superframe RED not selected GREEN selected Sets the line coding to alternate mark inversion RED not selected GREEN selected Sets the line coding to B8ZS RED not selected GREEN selected Pulse density enforcement for AMI mode to force a one after 15 consecutive zeros Section 4 5 2 Framing and Line Code Configuration RED not selected GREEN selected Source of multiplexer s timing Section 4 4 T1 Transmitter Timing TIME Gr
225. power supply are on one of these scenarios has occurred A Both power modules have failed o Fuses on both power supply circuit boards have blown o Most likely power has not been wired to the shelf e Ifthe POWER lights turn on but the POWER FAIL light for one power supply is on as well that power module is not functioning or there is a blown fuse on its printed circuit board Test for correct voltages 5 Observe that each CM 5RB module displays its current mode setting for several seconds after power is first applied In a terminal multiplexer ACS 163 ACS 166 or ACS 167 the display should read TERM in a drop and insert multiplexer ACS 165 or ACS 168 the module in slot 1 should display DI A and the module in slot 2 should display DI B Redundant CM 5RB modules always display BKUP during power up Section 3 4 Redundant CM 5RB Installation and Configuration gives further details on redundant common modules The multiplexer mode can also be set to spare SPAR 3 7 Channel Module Installation You do not need to turn off an existing system before adding more channel modules to it However to install channel modules into an existing system without affecting other in service channels always follow these two basic rules e Verify that sufficient shelf power is available Section 3 7 1 e Verify time slot availability and set time slot and channel direction accordingly Section 3 7 2 The new channel module can be placed in
226. ption to the above rule is if line redundancy mode LRDN NOBK no backup line If LRDN NOBK a primary module failure results in a switch to primary line If Framing Type SF versus ESF is different for the two lines selection must be Diff If the line code is different AMI versus B8ZS a Diff setting is recommended If TLBO Transmit Line Buildout setting differs by more than 7 dB between primary and backup a Diff setting is recommended Table 4 12 LRDN Group Menu Functions Group CNFG PRIM 4 22 Item Off RVRT NRVT NOBK Factory default Exit N A Description Never switch lines due to line failure RVRT Revertive switching Switches to backup line upon failure of primary line and then switches back to primary line if primary line becomes better than the backup line or if both the primary and backup lines are good NRVRT Non revertive switching Switches to backup line upon failure of primary line and then switch back to the primary line if the primary line becomes better than the backup line No backup line Notifies controlling common module that no backup line is available In this condition module only redundancy is implemented if the primary line fails the CM 5RB modules do not switch to the backup line Also shelf alerts and alarms are not generated based on the backup line condition Exit the CNFG sub menu Displays the use of the primary line If the ON OFF indicator light is gre
227. r Figure 2 16 e Extended superframe ESF which groups 24 frames together Figure 2 17 Whether a particular T1 line operates with SF or ESF framing depends on the T1 service provider The ESF format provides better error detection than SF and you should use it whenever possible however some older networks and channel service units CSUs do not support the ESF format ACS 160 Series multiplexers can be set to operate using either SF or ESF frame format Harris Corporation 2 23 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 2 Functional Description Version 2 11 August 2011 Ps Ics Frame Fi Onetimeslotbyte 8bits overhead generated 8 000 times per second SEX bit i 8 bits x 8 000 sec 64 kbps One T1 frame 24 8 bit time slot bytes plus one frame bit 193 bits total p d generated 8 000 times per second eee 193x 8 000 1 544 Mbps a One T1 Superframe 12 frames 2 316 bits total Figure 2 16 Superframe SF Format Frame Onetime slot byte 8 bits overhead generated 8 000 times per second bit E 8 bits x 8 000 sec 64 kbps tet tz res ree One T1 frame 24 8 bit time slot bytes plus one frame bit 193 bits total l generated 8 000 times per second X 193x8 00021 544Mbps gu One T1 Extended Superframe 24 frames 4 632 bits total Figure 2 17 Extended Superframe ESF Format 2
228. r usually present on an incoming signal The CM 5RB module receives T1 line input via the MA 215 MA 216 MA 217B MA 235 1 or MA 235 2 module adapter Equipment and monitor T1 in jacks function like the T1 out jacks described previously All equipment connected to them should provide 100 ohms termination The equipment in jack breaks the connection to the T1 line input the monitor in jack does not but the signal level at the monitor jack is about 20 decibels below the input level 2 1 3 4 T1 Aggregate Demultiplexing to I ndividual Channels The decoded line receive signal feeds the demultiplexer circuitry First the demultiplexing circuitry achieves frame synchronization using a proprietary robust framing algorithm that assures fast frame acquisition and a high tolerance to errors once a frame is acquired The average frame time for the SF format is 4 milliseconds and for the ESF format is less than 18 milliseconds Mean time to lose frame in the presence of a high 10 random bit error rate exceeds several hours Figure 2 5 2 4 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 2 Functional Description ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 1 Year 1 Hour 10 1 Second Mean time to lose frame seconds 1 Millisecond 107 10 w 1074 Average bit error rate BER Figure 2 5 Mean Time to Lose T1 Frame Synchronization
229. rations to support point to point point to multipoint and other network topologies Key ACS 160 Series features include e Proprietary robust framing algorithm optimized to maintain operation in poor transmission environments Versatile system timing options to facilitate connection to almost any network Reliability small size low power consumption and configuration flexibility Compliance with ANSI SF D4 and ESF T1 frame formats Support for both B8ZS and AMI T1 line codes Byte formatted time division multiplexing for compatibility with local exchange and inter exchange carrier digital cross connect switches DCS e Convenient built in diagnostic capability e Remote access for control and status monitoring e Integrated channel service unit CSU compliant with ANSI T1 403 and AT amp T TR54016 MA 235 e Reporting of near and far end line performance statistics e Integrated digital time delay option e Optional redundant power supply capability for 3RU systems e Optional T1 line and common module redundancy e A wide variety of channel modules including Wideband data e Synchronous and asynchronous data Voice High fidelity program audio The Intraplex STL HD product packages consist of a pair of STL 160 Series multiplexers equipped with one or more sets of program audio transport modules and optionally one or more sets of voice and data modules 1 1 Manual Scope This manual is the primary reference covering the confi
230. rected If you have selected a line failure LOF LOS YEL AIS for a switching criterion the configuration should be set to non revertant NVRT due to the switching mechanics For example if a yellow alarm is received and a switch occurs the primary CM 5RB module no longer reports a yellow alarm because the signals are no longer coming into it If the switching is set to revert RVRT the failure appears repaired to the backup CM and the backup switches control back to the primary CM The primary CM once again detects an alarm and another backup switch occurs This cycling of the switch back and forth between redundant CMs continues until the alarm condition is removed The non revertant configuration should also be set if the switches for loss of frame LOF or loss of signal LOS are activated ON also due to switching mechanics The module adapter directs the T1 line signals to only one CM 5RB If the backup CM 5RB module is active it has the T1 line signal The primary CM 5RB module can never regain the line signal and therefore remains in a failed condition A switch is initiated 50ms after a report is received that meets the switching criteria The total time for switching from the primary CM to a backup CM or vice versa is less than 100 ms but results in a loss of frame and signal during that period of time When reverting back to the primary the backup CM must first transmit the channel module configuration settings to the primary
231. requirements To configure the CM 5RB module s CSU perform these steps 1 Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display reads TSEL 2 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch to cycle through the available functions in the TSEL group The green top bi level indicator light turns on when the display shows the currently set selection for the CSU The red bottom indicator light turns on when the display shows the other configurations not selected for CSU Harris Corporation 4 17 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 4 Setup amp Configuration Version 2 11 August 2011 3 To change either of the current settings perform these steps a Press down on the SET NEXT switch until the display shows the desired setting The green light blinks indicating a change is about to be made b Press up twice on the SET NEXT switch The green light turns on continuously indicating the function on the display is active Table 4 7 Channel Service Unit CSU Configurations Function Description Off Disables the internal CM 5RB CSU for operation with an external CSU The settings that follow determine the configuration of the external CSU ATT With this position on the CM 5RB module is compliant with AT amp T Technical Reference 54016 ANSI With this position on the CM 5RB module is compliant with ANSI T1 403 ESF Data Link messages 4 5 2 Framing and Line Code Con
232. reshold is 10 Soft Failure Unavailable Signal State UAS Soft Failure Remote Alarm Indication Signal RAIS or Yellow Soft Failure When operating in AEC mode Section 2 1 4 11 Module or Line Redundancy Alarms and Alerts Unavailable Signal State UAS is declared after 10 consecutive Severely Errored Seconds SES and cleared after 10 error free seconds where an SES is defined as a second with 101 or more errors For Standard non FTI mode UAS is declared after 10 consecutive SES and cleared after 10 consecutive non SES where an SES is a second with 320 or more errors Intraplex equipment monitors the performance of both the primary and backup T1 lines and assigns a type code to it e Good e Soft Fail e Hard Fail Good condition is preferable to Soft Fail condition Accordingly Soft Fail is better than Hard Fail When a switch in line occurs both the backup CM 5RB module and MA 235 module adapter become active Figure 2 10 Harris Corporation 2 13 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 2 Functional Description Version 2 11 August 2011 System Bus Primary T1 Line channel dul OE CM 5RB primary MA 235 1 common module module adapter channel module Backup T1 Line ooo channel module Figure 2 10 Signal Flow after Primary Line Failure Table 2 4 shows the detection times for the selectable T1 line BER thresholds Detection times are
233. ries T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 3 Installation amp Wiring Version 2 11 August 2011 3 5 1 MA 215 and MA 217B Module Adapters A CM 5RB module equipped with an MA 215 or MA 217B module adapter provides for connectivity with a channel service unit CSU Figure 3 7 shows the MA 215 top and faceplate and the MA 217B faceplate The top of the MA 217B adapter looks nearly identical to the MA 215 adapter with the exception of the DB 15 jack Table 3 2 describes the MA 215 and MA 217B components and where to find information for each O MA 215 oooooooo ooooooo N T I M N G O U T REMOTE Figure 3 7 MA 215 and MA 217B Module Adapter Top and Front Views Table 3 2 MA 215 and MA 217B Module Adapter Components Component Description SW1 Input Bias switches Table 3 3 gives settings SW2 Operating mode Figure 3 7 shows switch settings JP1 Not used JP2 Common module redundancy Ji T1 network port Tables 3 11 and 3 12 gives pin assignments J2 Remote port Table 3 15 gives pin assignments J3 External timing in port Table 3 13 gives pin assignments J4 External timing out port Table 3 174 gives pin assignments 3 6 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 3 Installation amp Wiring ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 SW1 on the MA 215 or MA 217B adapter performs these functions e RS 485 remote port bias e
234. right channel time slot is set to 14 P05 1 B00000001 Set to 15kHz bandwidth P06 1 B00000001 Both left and right channels are active P07 0 B00000000 Left channel is set to 16 bit coding P08 0 B00000000 Right channel is set to 16 bit coding P09 0 B00000000 Set to transmit via the DI A port P10 0 B00000000 The scrambler is off Table 5 17 shows the four commands you enter Table 5 17 Commands to Change Channel Time Slot and Bandwidth Command Meaning 7 C4 SET P01 9 Set the first left channel time slot to 9 7 C4 SET P05 0 Set to 7 5kHz mode 7 C4 SET P06 0 Set right channel to OFF 7 C4 SET P01 9 Set to transmit via the DI B port After each command the system responds OK To verify that the changes are correct type 7 C4 CONFIG The system repeats its previous response The second time slot for the left channel and both time slots for the right channel have not been changed and they show up on the configuration listing with their old settings This does not matter because when the PT 150A module is configured to transmit a single 7 5 kHz channel only the first time slot on the left channel is active Turn the module back on with this command 7 C4 SET SRVC ON Relock the remote port on the DI A common module with the command 7 DI A LOCK The system responds OK The changeover is complete 5 38 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control A
235. rk Timing gt Internally Through Loop Timed Timed Timed DE s ACS 11 Circuit PTT i ACS i PTT 1Ci ACS is ircui Network T1 Circuit 265 T1 Circuit Network T1 Circuit 163 di Figure 4 7 Drop and Insert System Internally Timed from One End Not Synchronized to Network 4 14 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 4 Setup amp Configuration ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Station Clock or other 1 544 MHz timing source Externally Timed PTT T4 Network Figure 4 8 Point to Point System Externally Timed from One End Not Synchronized to Network 4 4 5 Synchronized T1 Systems Multiple ACS 160 Series systems can be synchronized by deriving their timing from the same timing source One way to accomplish this synchronization is to create a daisy chain configuration with the external timing outputs and inputs of several head end terminal multiplexers Figure 3 9 Multiple ACS 160 Series systems loop timed to the same network are also synchronized to each other and to the network T1 systems are synchronized to prevent buffer overflows or underflows generally called slips in these types of network switching systems e Digital central offices e PBXs e Digital cross connect systems Harris Corporation 4 15 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp
236. rns on indicating this number is not the current address OFF Eas 9 Press up twice on the SET NEXT switch to change the current address to match the 0040 on E71 display After the second press the green top light turns on and the red bottom OFF light turns off indicating the display shows the current address 5 1 1 2 Remote Port Parameters SIO Group Setting The ACS 160 Series remote port is an RS 232 compatible serial interface Table A 2 summarizes the Serial Input Output SIO group functions The group contains settings for three parameters e Remote port baud rate 110 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 200 or 57 600 bps e Parity mode mark space even or odd e Remote access lock locked or unlocked Can be used to unlock the remote port locally if the remote access password is lost Note The remote port always operates using seven data bits one parity bit and one stop bit You cannot change these parameters 5 1 1 3 SIO Group Selection To select the SIO group press up or down on the GROUP switch one or more times until SIO appears in the display At this point each downward press on the SET NEXT switch displays the next SIO function Table 5 2 The three functions in the SIO group are e BAUD e PAR e Lock 5 4 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 BAUD and PAR are both unde
237. roadcast harris com 2 On the navigation bar click Services amp Support Client Support site for all Products 3 Logon If you do not have an account click New User and fill in the required information 4 At Self Service click Download Software Updates 5 14 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 At Table of Contents click I ntraplex At the I ntraplex Table of Contents click I ntraGuide At Download Name click the link The File Download dialog box appears Click Save Navigate to the location you want to store the IntraGuide software on your computer and click Save Q0 Lor ui Once you have loaded the IntraGuide software perform these steps to access it 1 Ensure that the cabling is properly connected from the equipment to the PC Sections 3 6 4 and 5 1 1 1 e If you are connecting directly from your computer to the CM 5RB remote port ensure that the RS 232 cable is properly connected e If you are using IntraGuide software over an IP network make sure that gt The CM 5RB remote port is properly connected to an SCM IP module o The SCM IP module is properly installed and configured o The SCM IP module is connected to the same IP network as the computer running the IntraGuide software 2 Ensure that each of the channel modules is set to REMOTE If the REMOTE is not enabled you ca
238. ror detection than SF and is generally recommended over SF The only limitation of ESF is that some older carrier networks cannot support it The SF and ESF formats are mutually exclusive functions ESF is the factory default framing format AMI Alternate mark inversion A bipolar line code composed of pulses pulses and zeros In an AMI encoded signal every pulse has the opposite polarity of the pulse that precedes it regardless of the number of zeros between them The major limitation of AMI is that it cannot support 64 kbps clear channel capability B8ZS Bipolar with 8 zero substitution A modified bipolar line code in which strings of eight zeros are replaced by zero substitution codes Thus T1 signals using the B8ZS line code maintain sufficient ones density regardless of the number of zeros in the data to support unrestricted 64 Kbps clear channel capability The only limitation of B8ZS is that some older channel service units CSUs and carrier networks cannot support it The AMI and B8ZS line codes are mutually exclusive functions B8ZS is the factory default line code PDE Pulse density enforcement The data must meet the ones density requirements specified in AT amp T Technical Reference 54016 or ANSI T1 403 ESF Data Link messages which requires that when AMI is engaged approximately 1 in every 8 bits must be a one and no more than 15 consecutive zeros can be sent If the data violates this requirement for ones density
239. rporation 3 21 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 3 Installation amp Wiring Version 2 11 August 2011 3 If available activate the local equipment loopback on the channel module itself and perform local loopbacks tests on this module Individual channel module manuals give details 4 Before leaving Location 1 be sure to remove the channel loopback Make sure that no alarm or alert indicator lights are on At Location 2 install and wire the module adapter provided with the second channel module 6 Install the channel module at Location 2 Warning f the ALARM or ALERT indicator light on the power supply turns on remove the channel module immediately 7 If available activate the local equipment loopback on the channel module itself and perform local loopback tests on this module Remove the channel loopback 9 If desired perform end to end tests or single ended far end loopback tests with the other site 10 Ensure that no alarm or alert indicator lights are on 3 22 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products Section 4 Setup amp Configuration This section describes the setup options for ACS 160 Series multiplexers and explains how to make changes to them After setup go to these sections for additional information e Section 5 Remote Control Operation gives information on using the remote access and control feature e Section 6
240. rscored indicating that there is an additional menu layer beneath them that contains more functions BAUD and PAR may be thought of as subgroups within the SIO function group The Lock function is not underscored indicating that it is a standard function and therefore does not have an additional menu layer beneath it Table 5 2 SI O Group Function Setting Description BAUD 110 110 bps baud 300 300 bps rate 1200 1200 bps 2400 2400 bps 4800 4800 bps 9600 9600 bps 19 2 19 2 kbps 57 6 57 6 kbps exit When exit is displayed press up on the SET NEXT switch to exit the BAUD subgroup and display the PAR function PAR Spac Space No parity all parity bits set to zero parity Mark Mark No parity all parity bits set to one Even Even parity Each parity bit is set so that the total number of ones in each data byte including the parity bit is even Odd Odd parity Each parity bit is set so that the total number of ones in each data byte including the parity bit is odd exit When exit is displayed press up on the SET NEXT switch to exit the PAR subgroup and display the Lock function Lock When the Lock function is displayed press up twice on the SET NEXT switch to toggle the state of the remote port between locked and unlocked The green top light turns on when the port is locked the red bottom light turns on when the port is unlocked To exit the Lock function and display the BAUD subgroup press down on the S
241. ry default Diff Description Never switches modules due to module failure Revertive module switching Switches to backup module upon failure of primary module and then switches back to primary if the failure condition is cleared or if the backup module has failed Non revertive module switching Switches to backup module upon failure of primary module and then switches back to the primary if the backup module has failed Exit the CNFG sub menu Displays the usage of the primary module If the ON OFF indicator light is green ON state the primary module is being used If the ON OFF light is red OFF state the backup module is being used Also you can use this switch to manually generate a switch to the primary module by momentarily toggling the SET NEXT switch to the UP position Displays the usage of the backup module If the ON OFF indicator light is green ON state the backup module is being used If the ON OFF light is red OFF state the primary module is being used Also this switch can be used to manually generate a switch to the backup module by momentarily toggling the SET NEXT switch to the UP position If Same this function switches to the backup module and backup line upon a primary module failure same type T1 facility for primary and backup lines If Diff switch to the backup module and backup line upon a primary module failure different type T1 facility for primary and backup lines Note that the exce
242. s ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 3 Installation amp Wiring Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 3 10 lists the pin assignments for the T1 I O DB 15 connector for the MA 217B module adapter Table 3 10 T1 I O Connector Pin Assignments on MA 217B Connector DB 15 Pins Label Description 1 Tip and 9 T1 Tip T1 Out The balanced T1 output of the corresponding CM 5RB 8 96 15 Ring R1 Ring module o 2 3 Tip and T1 Tip T1 In The balanced T1 input of the corresponding CM 5RB es 1 Ring R1 Ring module o 1 E 9 2 4 8 amp 10 T1 signal grounds These pins may be used to provide signal ground to an external DCE such as a T1 CSU All other pins Not used Figure 3 13 shows the normal connections between the T1 I O connector on an MA 215 MA 235 1 or MA 235 2 module adapter and the T1 I O connector on a channel service unit CSU Network R1 Receive data ACS 160 110 1 multiplexer T1 connector Ri i on MA 215 1 DIM LZ 211 7 4 1 Send data 9 4 5 5 Figure 3 13 T1 Circuit between MA 215 MA 235 1 or MA 235 2 and CSU Figure 3 14 shows the normal connections between the T1 I O connector on an MA 217B and the T1 I O connector on a channel service unit CSU Nata Pin Pin eda L4 i Send data ACS 160 9e E e i i CSU multiplexer T1 connector i Mo on MA 217B 3e
243. s detected at the T1 input Excess jitter is detected at the T1 input The T1 receiver has lost frame synchronization The T1 receiver in the DI B module has lost frame synchronization Reported by a DI A module only The T1 receiver in the DI A module has lost frame synchronization Reported by a DI B module only A framed or unframed all ones signal is detected at the T1 input A Yellow Alarm signal is detected at the T1 input The Payload Loopback is active The T1 Line Loopback is active The T1 Equipment Loopback is active There are two or more channel modules assigned to time slot n The time slots are 1 24 There is a bit error rate alarm Section 6 3 5 3 Studio Transmitter Link STL Alarms Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 5 7 Alert and Alarm Messages Responding To STATUS Command continued Message Meaning RECEI VI NG REMOTE ALARM There is an alarm condition at the remote end of the network NETWORK PAYLD LB ON payload The network payload loopback is active loopback on using loopback timing for payload loopback NETWORK LI NE LB ON line The network line loopback is active loopback on LOSS OF NTWK MGMT COMM The master station detects a break in the network ring which means a CONTI NUI TY break due to multiple master stations in the ring a hardware failure
244. s in the LPBK group which may both be activated at the same time 1 5 2 I ndicator Lights In addition to the indicator lights on the CM 5RB common module four system status indicator lights located on the power supply are visible when the front cover of the shelf is on Figures 1 1 and 1 2 Table 1 1 summarizes the meaning of the indicator lights on both the CM 5RB common module and the power supply For all the lights on means the light is on continuously blink means a rhythmic one half second on one half second off pulse and flash means erratic flickering Table 2 1 in Section 2 1 3 7 gives more details for CM 5RB indicator lights and Table 2 8 in Section 2 1 5 gives more details for power supply indicator lights Harris Corporation 1 9 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 1 Introduction Table 1 1 CM 5RB and Power Supply Status I ndicator Lights Indicator Light Group T1 Status CM 5RB T1 Error and Alarm CM 5RB Timing CM 5RB System Status CM 5RB System Status Power Supply 1 10 Light TX OUT Green RX IN Green ERR Yellow BPV FRM Red YEL Yellow AIS LOOP Green INT Green EXT Green LPBK Yellow CPU Red POWER Green NORMAL Green ALERT Yellow ALARM Red Description On when transmit output is detected On when receive input is detected Blinks stead
245. s multiplexers including these types e Voice Modules Voice modules provide digital transport of telephony fax and modem circuits Signaling options include E amp M Types II III V loop start ground start ARD and transmission These modules provide e 2 wire Foreign Exchange Office FXO FXS PCM and ADPCM voice e 4 wire E amp M PCM and ADPCM voice e Wideband 7 5 kHz voice e Motorola SECURENET secure digital voice e Data Modules Data modules provide digital transport of one way or full duplex data circuits supporting a variety of data rates and formats including synchronous asynchronous and plesiochronous These modules include e High speed synchronous data up to 1 984 Mbps for 10Base LAN V 35 X 21 RS 449 and TIL e 10BaseT Ethernet LAN bridging e Four port asynchronous data up to 38 4 kbps for RS 232 and RS 449 e Five port synchronous data up to 19 2 kbps for RS 232 e High speed synchronous data that can be optionally decoupled from the network timing at any data rate up to 1 984 Mbps e Program Audio Modules Program audio modules provide digital transport for signals up to 20 kHz stereo They are available with analog or AES EBU input or output These modules include e Linear uncompressed 15 or 20 kHz stereo audio with minimum delay Enhanced Apt X 4 1 compressed audio for signals up to 20 Khz stereo with low delay e ITU T J 41 audio that employs 14 11 instantaneous companding e Full duplex cod
246. s using a combination of RS 485 and DSO management communications 5 8 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control Point to Point Configurations ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Point to point configurations are straightforward In these systems the computer connects to a CM 5RB module and controls both the local CM 5RB module and the CM 5RB module at the far end Figure 5 5 Time Slot 24 CM 5RB T1 Circuit Master CM 5RB Slave Figure 5 5 DSO Communication in Simple Point to Point Configuration Drop and Insert Configurations A point to point configuration can be extended to control multiple locations using only a single DSO channel Figure 5 6 shows how to connect a drop and insert multiplexer If the network master is located at the drop and insert multiplexer the DI A must be the master and the DI B must be the slave CM 5RB Master Time Slot 24 T1 Circuit CM 5RB DI A Slave CM 5RB DI B Slave Time Slot 24 T1 Circuit CM 5RB Slave Harris Corporation D I Multiplexer Figure 5 6 DSO Communication in Drop and Insert Configuration Star Configurations The Intraplex T1 CrossConnect s digital cross connect DCS capabilities make it possible to create new network topologies One of these is the star network Figure 5 7 This star configuration example
247. shelf is equipped with two power supplies the failure of one supply creates an ALERT condition The power supply also contains the ACO Alarm Cut Off switch The ACO switch disables the Alert and Alarm relays and is used to silence a local alarm If two power supplies are installed only possible in a 3RU shelf both ACO switches must be turned on to silence an alarm Turning on the ACO switch is one of the conditions that cause the Alert light to turn on It has no effect on the Alarm light Power supply test points E9 E10 E11 and E12 allow testing for proper voltages Section 6 6 4 Power Supply Test gives the procedure for using these test points Figure 2 12 contains a simplified functional diagram of the power supply Harris Corporation 2 19 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 2 Functional Description Version 2 11 August 2011 Protected power Pd e Kt AC or DC Power AX input Power supply 5 Volts LU Normal Xx 15 Volts LI 15 Volts Supply Ry Common Fail Power fail sense i Alert common E Alert gt Normally closed Alert L Normally open Contacts Alarm control Alarm common Normally closed Alarm Contacts i J Alarm 0O i Status signals from common module Figure 2 12 Power Supply Module Functional Diagram 2 1 6 Channel Modules Intraplex produces a wide variety of channel modules for the ACS 160 Serie
248. smit 3 Not used 4 RS 232 receive 5 Signal ground 6 RS 485 positive 1 Receive from network ring 2 Receive from network tip 3 Not used 4 Send towards network ring 5 Send towards network tip 6 Not used 7 Frame ground transmit 8 Frame ground receive Pinouts not necessary Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 3 Installation amp Wiring ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 MA235 2 Tt Et BACKUP I m M G aco lle SETAN OL TOETAN OL ELEEEEELLEELTE ma nano cnno ona Figure 3 8 MA 235 1 and MS 235 2 Face Plates and Connector Locations Each module adapter has a DIP style switch for system setup Table 3 6 shows the MA 235 1 Switch 1 functions and settings and Table 3 7 shows the MA 235 2 Switch 1 functions and settings You must configure these switches before installing the module adapters in the shelf Table 3 6 MA 235 1 Switch 1 Functions and Settings Factory Positions Default Description 1 On This switch position controls the external timing input impedance 120 ohms TIMING IN port This switch is normally set to On When using a daisy chain configuration the last multiplexer in the chain should have this switch On and the others should be Off 2 On This switch controls the input impedance of the time delay control port when using the optional time delay capability It is normally set to O
249. stallation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 of o o o o o o Q ojojo EX MA 219 MA 215 E ALARMS r ALERT ALARM NO COM NC NO COM NC qii I iE iz 25 4 sw UE UK 1 0 f C gd d tal d d i n Gof qr POWER SUPPLIES ONY oj OF OF OF O ojo b O 1 e MADE INUS A MA 215 for second CM 5RB MA 215 for first CM 5RB Figure 1 12 ACS 166 Multiplexer Rear View Connector for alarm out signal battery and ring generator input MA 215 for CM 5RR AC power in Figure 1 13 ACS 167 Multiplexer Rear View MA 215 for DI B CM 5RB ud nea Casi Ol o Jo MA 215 for DI B CM 5RB Figure 1 14 ACS 168 Multiplexer Rear View rp oui tuwuhe Lun L Bottom CM 5RB controls MA 215 for first CM 5RB Top CM 5RB controls these channel modules these channel modules Figure 1 15 ACS 169 Multiplexer Rear View 1 5 CM 5RB User Interface This section describes the ACS 160 Series local user interface Section 5 Remote Control Operation gives details on using the remote interface The jacks switches and indicator lights on the CM 5RB common module form the primary user interface for the ACS 160 Series Figure 1 16 multiplexers This user interface falls into three basic categories e Test Access The left side of the module contains T1 input and output test jacks e Configuration The center section contains these items that work together so that you can view and change CM 5RB operational
250. t ADDRESS gt TERM A STAT ACS 165 A direction XADDRESS DI A ATT STAT ACS 165 B direction lt ADDRESS gt DI B A STAT Evaluate ATT STAT Responses The 15 minute ATT STAT registers can hold a maximum of 900 events one for each second in the interval 60 seconds per minute X 15 minutes 900 seconds The 15 minute interval registers should never exceed 900 The 24 hour registers can hold a maximum of 65535 events If the number of events exceeds 65535 the register remains at that number until the point in the current 24 hour period when there is not a 15 minute event record At that time the sum of the 15 minute intervals decreases Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 43 ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 Note The network can request that CSU line performance registers be reset to zero which might present a false indication of line performance Here is a typical response to the ATT STAT command OK MEASURE SECS 643 VALID INTERVALS 42 15MIN 24HR TOT 0 ERRORED SECS UNAVAIL SECS BUR ERRD SECS SEV ERRD SECS CTL SLIP SECS oOo OooOoo0o0oc0 Cc c OO oO LOSS OF FRAME Table 5 23 describes the data in an ATT STAT response Issue REGI STERS Command You can query a detailed history of the ACS 160 Series multiplexer s AT am
251. t to either B8ZS Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution or AMI alternate mark inversion B8ZS is the preferred format you should always use B8ZS unless the network or channel service unit cannot support it Section 2 2 1 2 T1 Line Coding gives a description of these line coding methods Equipment and monitor test jacks on the front of the module accept input of miniature bantam plugs They allow the T1 output of the multiplexer to be connected to a T1 transmission test set or to be fed directly into the input of another multiplexer during bench testing The T1 line output connection is via the MA 215 module adapter Inserting a plug into the T1 equipment out jack breaks the outgoing connection to the MA 215 module adapter Terminating impedance should be 100 ohms balanced The T1 monitor out jack permits test access to the line output without breaking the T1 line connection Equipment connected to this jack should also provide a 100 ohm termination impedance The signal level at this point is approximately 20 decibels below the line output level 2 1 3 3 T1 Line Receiver T1 input should be at the standard DS 1 digital cross connect level DSX 1 T1 frame format can be either ESF or SF The line code can be either B8ZS bipolar with 8 zero substitution or AMI alternate mark inversion The line receiver e Accepts the input signal e Recovers receive timing e Decodes the bipolar signal A jitter buffer follows to smooth out the timing jitte
252. ter the first press the green top light blinks indicating that a change is about to be made After the second press the light turns on continuously indicating that the STL alarms are now enabled 6 8 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 6 4 System Check Out Procedures These general procedural guides help you test a newly installed ACS 160 system prior to bringing the system on line If you are using a redundant CM 5RB module remove the inactive module for this test 1 Start testing at the master timing location that is at the terminal multiplexer that is internally or externally timed If both terminal multiplexers are loop timed start at either end 2 In a drop and insert system check out locations in the order in which they appear in the system 3 Test each location locally before performing system tests Use the procedure in Section 6 4 1 for terminal multiplexers and the procedure in Section 6 4 2 for drop and insert multiplexers 4 After performing the system level tests described in this section you might also wish to test the individual circuits formed by the channel modules in the multiplexers The individual channel module manuals give recommended test procedures for each type of circuit If these procedures do not produce the desired test results Section 6 6 gives troubleshooting t
253. the PDE puts ones in the output data to ensure density compliance It also put errors in the data 4 18 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 4 Setup amp Configuration ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 4 6 Redundant CM 5RB Modules REDN Group Redundant CM 5RB modules have a special group added to the front panel user interface called the redundancy REDN group This group is only visible on the backup CM 5RB module it is suppressed on the primary CM 5RB module Depress the group switch on the backup CM 5RB module until REDN appears This information also applies to the CM 5RTD redundant time delay common module You can remotely control the delay feature on the redundant CM 5RTD module Section 4 7 However there are a few additional requirements for configuration of redundant time delay common modules The time delay function TDLY in the basic menu group and the time delay parameter Topt in the advanced menu group must be configured identically on all CM 5RTD configurations Also the multiplexer bus address 1 36 of each CM 5RTD module must be unique Table 3 9 shows the REDN group menu items and their parameters Table 4 9 REDN Group Menu Functions Sub menu Item Description CNFG Configuration sub menu OFF Never switch to backup RVRT Revertive switching Switches to backup on detection of failure in primary then switches back to primary when f
254. the second press it turns on continuously indicating the option you wanted to change is now enabled These areas of the manual give details on basic menu functions e T1 operational functions Section 4 4 T1 Transmitter Timing TIME Group and Section 4 5 T1 Frame Format and Line Code TSEL Group describe the timing TIME and signal format line code TSEL groups respectively Section 4 6 Redundant CM 5RB REDN Group describes redundant CM 5RB settings e Diagnostic functions Section 6 Testing and Troubleshooting describes the loopback LPBK and informational BLNK RVU1 and DIAG groups e Remote access setup functions Section 5 1 1 2 Configuration Network Address ADDR Group Setting and Section 5 1 1 3 Configuration Remote Port Parameters SIO Group Setting describe the shelf address ADDR and remote port SIO groups respectively Section 5 1 2 DSO Management Communications describes internal DSO management control settings COMM 4 3 CM 5RB Advanced Configuration Group Menu In addition to the basic configuration features the CM 5RB module also contains an Advanced Configuration Group for controlling specialized functions that rarely need adjustment in most systems 4 6 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 4 Setup amp Configuration ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 4 3 1 Enter Advanced Configuration Group To access the Adva
255. ting to narrow Forces the setting to wide Exit PLL and display EIB Customer application menu RED not selected GREEN selected Standard alarm declaration criteria Modified alarm criteria Modified alarm criteria for use in studio to transmitter links STLs Modified line criteria Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 4 Setup amp Configuration ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 4 3 CM 5RB Advanced Configuration Group Menu continued Function Group Description Topt f3 5 Default Time delay options This parameter activates the time delay function TDLY on the Configuration Group menu The TDLY function is used to control delay characteristics of the CM 5RTD module s integrated time delay capability RED time delay option not activated GREEN time delay option activated R Rx f2 4 Reset receiver This function resets the receive side of the common module by forcing it out of frame and allowing it to re synchronize Rcpu f2 5 Reset CPU This function resets the CM 5RB module s central processing unit CPU The effect is the same as removing and restoring power to the common module This reset does not change the module s configuration settings 4 4 T1 Transmitter Timing TI ME Group The TIME group selects the timing source that the T1 transmitter uses to clock the outgoing data stream When a CM 5RB module is set up for use in
256. tion Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 4 3 CM 5RB Advanced Configuration Group Menu Function FTIM RTIM RXGN JBUF FRAM Group FLoo FI nt Default FExt FSec exit Off Auto Default exit 30dB 36dB exit J off J 32 Default J128 Jrst exit f3 5 Default f2 4 f2 5 exit Harris Corporation Intraplex Products Description Fallback timing mode This function sets the timing source used in the event that primary timing is lost RED not selected GREEN selected Fallback timing set to loop timing recovered from received T1 Fallback timing set to internal multiplexer s oscillator Fallback timing set to external clock input connector Fallback timing set to secondary external Exit FTIM and display RTI M Return timing mode When primary timing mode is set to external this function determines whether timing source automatically reverts back to primary RED not selected GREEN selected Timing remains in fallback mode after primary timing is restored Timing returns to primary mode after primary timing is restored Exit RTI M and display RXGN Receive signal gain input sensitivity This function adjusts the sensitivity of the T1 receiver Used for increasing gain with long cables RED not selected GREEN selected Receiver can accept a signal up to 30 dB below nominal Receiver can accept a signal up to 36 dB below nominal Exit RXGN and display J BUF
257. tion Intraplex Products 2 Functional Description ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 module configuration data has been downloaded to the primary module The configuration data downloads automatically when a working module is installed The replacement primary common module should be pre configured before installation Before reversion occurs channel module configuration data is automatically downloaded from the backup CM 5RB module to the replacement primary CM 5RB module During this download process the word WAIT is displayed on the front panel of the backup CM Reversion to the primary CM can be manually forced either from the front panel switches or via ISiCL even if automatic reversion is disabled 2 1 4 6 Line Failure Detection and Switching A switch from the primary T1 line to the backup T1 line is initiated by the equipment upon detection of line failure conditions Table 2 3 shows the available line failure conditions and their types You can either enable or disable each condition Table 2 3 Line Failure Conditions Line Failure Conditions Failure Type Loss of Frame OOF or LOF Hard Failure Loss of Signal LOS Hard Failure Alarm Indication Signal AIS Hard Failure Excessive Bit Error Rate BER for T1 ESF Extended Superframe Soft Failure Programmable thresholds are 10 10 10 or 10 9 Excessive Bit Error Rate BER for T1 SF Superframe Th
258. tion Intraplex Products 3 Installation amp Wiring ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 Note The wiring in Figures 3 15 through 3 18 is not needed with the VF 16A VF 16AE VF 18A or VF 18AE modules DC Power Source DC power source inputs to the multiplexer can have either positive or negative ground reference 23 SERIAL NO SIG BAT BAT BAT BAT BAT Af B leleteit ET Jumpers between BAT A amp B BAT A amp B are the Factory Default configuration and are intended for use with a SOURCE Be sure to remove jumpers when dual power sources are used ejefejejejejeje SE WITH Y S OWER SUPPLIES ONLY MADE IN U S A e Figure 3 15 Connection for DC Operation of 3RU Systems STATION GROUND n Primary DC Secondary DC Power Source Power Source ALARMS ALERT ALARM NO COM NC NO COM NC eJelelelelele e STATION GROUND Figure 3 16 Connection for DC Operation of 3RU Systems with Two Power Sources MADE IN U S A Harris Corporation 3 17 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 3 Installation amp Wiring Version 2 11 August 2011 e SERIAL NO SIG BAT BAT BAT BAT BAT A B A B Extemal slow blow fuse 1A for up to 12 VF circuits 2A for up to 24 ALARMS
259. tion of CONFIG Response for Example 2 0 ceeeee teen eee eee teense ennaeees 5 38 Table 5 17 Commands to Change Channel Time Slot and Bandwidth 0 cceeeeeeee ee eeee es 5 38 Table 5 18 ISiCL Syntax for Channel Module Alarm Masking 2 eeeeeeeeeee ee eee eee eaeeeneaee es 5 39 Table 5 19 Summary of ISiCL Commands for CSU Line Performance Data seeeeees 5 40 Table 5 20 CSU STAT Commands entrent x thiet iei i eram a ein Pat Ap Rue us 5 41 T ble 5 21 REMOTE STAT Commandin riei verd seis uet siudi en iE Music theta indu nine dvds tel dae 5 41 Table 5 22 CSU STAT and REMOTE STAT Response Data cssssssssss esee 5 42 Table 5 23 ATT STAT Command eren e intet exte ee iterare trei nri d Rr recie tic 5 43 Table 5 24 REGISTERS COMMANG is iii iilis ied ie kann EP e RR Enn ERR REA Seii E FR RE Ra came Rue 5 44 Table 5 25 ATT STAT and REGISTERS Response Data ssesssssse Hn 5 45 Table 6 1 Status Indicator Light Summary sssssssssssse mms 6 3 Table 6 2 EPBK Group noe p pL rial ental gdh ede de p pia eat Piae Feu cane EP SEES 6 4 Table 6 3 BUNK Group iie xen R ini XRe IV La dante ku DR Va RR DR Ede YR X de DE XR RIED 6 5 Table 6 4 RVUT GEOUD 3 soiree tte terre En Sete nbi ble ette a bte a ddted amina 6 6 Table e DIAG Group lt a TEES 6 7 Table 6 6 Indicator Lights in Terminal Multiplexer Loopback Test ssessssesse 6 10 Table 6 7 Indica
260. tions 2 and 3 If you are using a redundant CM 5RB module remove the inactive module for this test Perform these steps 1 To verify that the DI A CM 5RB module is set to DI A mode and the DI B CM 5RB module is set to DI B mode perform these steps for each CM 5RB Remove the module for a few seconds Re insert it Observe that it displays the correct mode DI A or DI B If it does go to Step 2 If the module does not display the correct mode check and correct the mode switch settings if needed on the module adapter at the rear of the shelf Section 3 5 Module Adapters gives the specific settings anov 2 To verify that T1 frame format and line code are set correctly for the T1 service available for each CM 5RB module perform these steps Note Always use ESF framing and B8ZS line code unless your CSU or T1 service provider cannot support them Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display shows TSEL Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch until the display shows the desired frame format SF or ESF If the green top light is on this frame format is selected C If the green light is off press up twice on the SET NEXT switch to select this format d Press down on the SET NEXT switch to display the desired line code B8ZS or AMI If the green light is on the line code is set to the displayed value e If the green light is off press up twice on the SET NEXT switch to change the line code
261. tions in the BLNK and RVU1 groups provide additional information on timing status To inspect these timing status functions perform these steps 1 Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the desired group BLNK or RVU1 appears on the display 2 Press down repeatedly on the SET NEXT switch to view the contents of the selected group Table 3 6 lists the meanings of these functions Table 4 6 Timing Status Functions Function Group Description Ftim BLNK Fallback timing Ftim in the BLNK group indicates that transmitter is in its fallback timing mode TXLk RVU1 Transmit lock The bi level ON OFF indicator light signifies status of T1 transmitter PLL ONES OFF Transmitter PLL is locked ON un f OFF Transmitter PLL is not locked TxRx RVU1 Transmit Receive lock When the transmit receive lock function is displayed the bi level ON OFF indicator lights signifies whether the transmitter timing is synchronized to incoming T1 signal timing ON Es n OFF Transmitter and receiver timing clocks are locked ON uw miat orr EM Transmitter and receiver timing clocks are not locked If top and bottom indicator lights are blinking on and off transmit and receive on En signals are not locked but their frequencies are close In this case each flash OFF of red bottom light corresponds to relative phase change of one T1 Unit Interval UI which is 648ns Relative phase change of one UI is called a bit slip by som
262. to any available physical slot on the shelf Section 3 7 3 gives a channel module installation procedure 3 20 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 3 Installation amp Wiring ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 3 7 1 Shelf Power for Additional Channel Modules Always verify that your multiplexer shelf has available power before adding channel modules to the unit Section 3 6 6 gives information on nominal power requirements for Intraplex common modules and for those module adapters that have active components Check the individual channel module manuals for channel modules power requirements Warning Do not exceed the capacity of the installed power supply module If needed Intraplex offers power supplies with greater capacity If additional channel modules would overload your power supply module or if you have questions about determining the power supply capacity needed contact Harris Customer Service 3 7 2 Channel Module Direction and Transmit Receive Time Slot Setting Set the channel module transmit receive direction using the guidelines in Section 4 2 3 Channel Module Communication Direction Use these guidelines to set the transmit and receive time slots for each channel module e In each direction of transmission always set up the two channel modules at either end of a new channel to use the same time slot or slots That is on a channel between Lo
263. to the displayed value 3 Putone end of a T1 patch cord or a 100 ohm termination plug into the T1 IN EQUIP jack of the DI B CM 5RB module establishing a no signal condition at the DI B T1 input This condition forces the DI A CM 5RB module to revert automatically to fallback internal timing ov 4 Using a second patch cord establish a loopback of the DI A CM 5RB module by connecting its T1 OUT EQUIP jack with its T1 IN EQUIP jack Alternatively activate the equipment loopback EqLB on the DI A CM 5RB module 5 Once the loopback is established verify that the lights on the DI A CM 5RB module respond Table 6 7 Harris Corporation 6 11 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting Version 2 11 August 2011 10 11 12 13 Table 6 7 Indicator Lights in Drop and Insert Loopback or DI A CM 5RB Test Patch Cord EqLB Indicator Loopback Loopback Equip TX OUT ON ON T1 OUT jacks Mon RX IN ON ON TP ERR OFF OFF T1 IN jacks o i YEL OFF OFF o GROUP switch BPV OFF OFF E E AIS OFF OFF unction a display Rc m FRM OFF OFF ON OFF e 1 LOOP BLI NKS BLINKS SET NEXT switch TX OUT INT ON ON RX IN YEL ERR BPV FRM Als LPBK OFF ON LOOP uH CPU OFF OFF LPBK SEM T NORMAL OFF OFF CM 5RB Module 32 sa ALERT ON ON o2 as v ALARM OFF OFF In a drop amp insert multiplexer the LOOP light actually indicates
264. tor Lights in Drop and Insert Loopback Test or DI A CM 5RB Test 6 12 Table 6 8 Indicator Lights in Drop and Insert Loopback Test or DI B CM 5RB Test 6 13 Table A 1 Delay Feature P Codes ssssssssssssssssessseee enne ne ne esse sess A 2 Table A 2 Delay Feature S Codes ssssssssssssssssesee nnn ene men eene eene A 3 Table A 3 CM 5RTD Indicator Lights esssssssssssssse meme emen emen eene A 3 Harris Corporation vii Intraplex Products This page is left blank intentionally viii Harris Corporation Intraplex Products Section 1 Introduction The Intraplex ACS 160 and STL 160 Series multiplexers are digital time division multiplexers designed to transport multiple voice data high fidelity program audio and other types of payload channels within a standard 1 544 Mbps T1 circuit The ACS 160 Series and the STL 160 Series multiplexers are identical except for the removable front face plate The ACS 160 Series face plate is solid and labeled ntraplex Access Server while the STL 160 Series has a plexiglass panel labeled Intraplex STL HD All references in this manual to the ACS 160 Series are equally applicable to the STL 160 Series with one exception the ACS 160 Series multiplexers are available in both 3RU and 1RU versions while the STL 160 Series are available in 3RU versions only ACS 160 and STL 160 Series multiplexers are available in terminal dual terminal and drop insert configu
265. u can set frame format to SF or ESF but not both Other functions are not mutually exclusive For example CM 5RB Line LnLB and Equipment EqLB loopbacks in the LPBK group may be set at the same time Read CM 5RB Module Indicator Lights Table 2 1 gives CM 5RB indicator light descriptions For all the lights ON means the light is on continuously BLINK means a rhythmic one half second on one half second off pulse and FLASH means erratic flickering Harris Corporation 2 7 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 2 Functional Description Version 2 11 August 2011 Table 2 1 CM 5RB Indicator Lights Light Description TX OUT Transmit output green E m ON The transmission signal is normal It can be a data signal or if idle an all ones signal OFF No signal is being transmitted indicating a hardware failure RX IN Receive input green ON A data signal is detected at the CM 5RB T1 receiver input OFF No signal is detected at the receiver input BLINK One of these signals or conditions is detected seen on the BLNK group display Rx11 A framed or unframed all ones signal produced by an idle condition at the far end an unframed all ones is a T1 alarm indication signal AIS RxYL A yellow alarm indicating a loss of the receive signal at the far end if the equipment at the far end is set up to generate a yellow alarm XsJt Excess jitter indicating t
266. uipment e Line e Payload Generally only one loopback is active at a time However the CM 5RB loopbacks are independent of each other you might want to have the line and equipment loopbacks active at the same time Warning Do not activate the payload and equipment loopbacks simultaneously Doing so sets up a feedback condition which sends the multiplexer into an alarm state 6 3 1 1 Loopback Location and Function If the LPBK indicator light on a CM 5RB module is on one or more of its T1 loopbacks are active Figure 6 4 shows the location of the three loopbacks in relation to the channel modules and T1 circuit and Table 6 2 describes their functions Voice data and program audio channels T1 line interface T1 Circuit DON Payload Equipment Line Loopback Loopback Loopback Figure 6 4 T1 Loopbacks Table 6 2 LPBK Group Message Function Description LnLB Line The entire T1 signal received by this module is looped passed through to its T1 output loopback Line code and frame format are passed from input to output without modification Thus all line code bipolar violations frame bit errors and CRC 6 errors received by the CM 5RB module are retransmitted without correction The line loopback forces the transmitted signal to be synchronized to the received signal However the line loopback is located behind the CM 5RB jitter buffer so that any received jitter is attenuated Figure 6 3 Thus
267. uits For safety reasons this fuse must be installed unless the back of the multiplexer is enclosed 5 If ALARM and ALERT contacts are to be used connect the desired contacts to terminal strip 2 pins 1 2 3 4 9 and 11 on a 1RU shelf 3 6 6 Available Power Each multiplexer shelf s power supply must provide sufficient power for all the common and channel modules in that shelf Some module adapters also contain active components that draw power Table 3 15 lists the nominal power requirements for all current Intraplex common modules and their module adapters Check the individual channel module manuals for those modules power requirements Table 3 15 Nominal Power Requirements for Common Modules and Module Adapters Nominal Nominal Power Power Used Used Module Watts Module Watts Common cune 2 6 CM 5RTD 2 8 Modules Active MA 235 1 1 0 MA 215 1 0 Module Adapters y4 235 2 1 0 MA 216 1 0 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 3 19 ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 3 Installation amp Wiring Version 2 11 August 2011 Warning Use Table 3 17 as a rough guide only channel modules actually draw varying amounts of current from each of several different voltages in the multiplexer When you add modules to a multiplexer and the nominal power requirement exceeds 35 watts for a 50 watt unit 30 watts for a 60 watt unit or 95 watts for a 100 watt
268. uld be a minimum of 2RU unoccupied space below this shelf For the 3RU shelf the standard power supply is a 60 watt universal AC supply with a minimum of 2RU unoccupied space below the shelf There are also 50 watt DC supplies for 3RU shelves in 48VDC 24VDC versions which require at least a 1RU of space between shelves Intraplex also produces optional 95 watt supplies for use in 3RU shelves with high power requirements These are also universal AC supplies and also require a minimum of 2RU of unoccupied space below the shelf The type and number of channel modules in the multiplexer determine the power requirements Each channel module installation and operation manual gives power requirement details Section 7 Specifications includes a listing of Intraplex power supplies Figure 1 4 through 1 15 show the physical placement of the ACS 160 components in the equipment shelf 1 4 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 1 Introduction ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 B A Figure 1 4 ACS 163 Multiplexer Front View no cover Primary Power Supply CM 5RB Primary Power Supply DI A DI B 16 slots for channel modules CM 5RB CM 5RB Figure 1 5 ACS 165 Multiplexer Front View no cover Primary Power Supply First CM 5RB Second CM 5RB 16 slots
269. ules This input may also be connected to an external loop current generator Warning This voltage source must be externally fused or current limited BATA None Primary battery DC power output when the shelf is DC powered May be used when connecting a second equipment shelf to the same DC power source This terminal with BAT A serve as the primary connections for a DC power supply BATA None Primary battery DC power output when the shelf is DC powered May be used when connecting a second equipment shelf to the same DC power source Also normally jumpered to SIG BAT when the DC power voltage is the same as the signaling voltage BAT B None Secondary battery DC power input This terminal with BAT B serve as the secondary connections for a DC power supply BAT B None Secondary battery DC power input This terminal with BAT B serve as the secondary connections for a DC power supply ALARM NO Pin 1 Alarm relay normally open contact ALARM NC Pin 2 Alarm relay normally closed contact ALERT NO Pin 3 Alert relay normally open contact ALERT NC Pin 4 Alert relay normally closed contact ALARM Pin 9 ALARM relay COMMON COM ALERT COM Pin 11 ALERT relay COMMON The 1RU shelf equivalents are pins on the DB 15 ALARMS connector When the shelf is not powered turned on all relays default to their alarm positions Normally open contacts are closed and normally closed contacts are open 3 16 Harris Corpora
270. up to 16 characters long Like the network address setting the password is actually a CM 5RB parameter rather than a multiplexer parameter You would normally use a password on a one per multiplexer basis that is you can assign the same password to both CM 5RB modules in a given ACS 165 drop and insert multiplexer However this is not a requirement When shipped from the factory each ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series multiplexer has a null password which means that the parameter field of an UNLOCK command must be left blank to unlock the remote port To change the password of a given CM 5RB module issue a SET command in the format lt Address gt lt Subaddress gt SET PASSWORD xyz Here xyz is the new password For example to set the password of a CM 5RB module to GREEN in an ACS 163 terminal multiplexer with an address of 7 issue the command 7 TERM SET PASSWORD GREEN Or to set the password of both CM 5RB modules to BLUE in an ACS 165 drop and insert multiplexer with an address of 8 issue two commands one to each remote port 8 DI A SET PASSWORD BLUE 8 DI B SET PASSWORD BLUE 7 FI If the password is lost or forgotten the multiplexer can still be unlocked locally using the Lock function in the SIO Group 5 24 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11
271. ved T1 data is called the Standby CM Primary The CM 5RB module installed in front of the MA 235 1 module adapter Backup The CM 5RB module installed in front of the MA 235 2 module adapter Active The CM 5RB module passing received T1 data Standby The CM 5RB module not passing received T1 data Based on the switching of a particular system either the primary or backup CM 5RB module can be the Active common module At initial system start up the primary CM 5RB module is automatically set as the Active CM The primary CM configured for terminal or DI A mode automatically turns on in the Primary role While in this role the primary CM constantly searches for backup CM 5RB modules on the shelf and if it finds one periodically reports status to backup through the multiplexer bus including e Mode e Hardware status e Line status Note The process of transmitting shelf data from a Primary to a Backup CM 5RB module can be slow With a full shelf of 18 modules it can take up to two full minutes for the Primary CM 5RB module to transmit an entire shelf image to the backup CM 5RB module The backup CM 5RB module monitors the report from the primary CM If the report fails to arrive or if the report indicates a hardware failure or a line failure the backup CM compares the report to the switching criteria set in the REDN group Section 4 6 Redundancy Configuration Group REDN If the failure and switch criteria match the bac
272. ways use ESF framing and B8ZS line code unless your CSU or T1 service provider cannot support them Press down on the GROUP switch until the display shows TSEL Press down on the SET NEXT switch until the display shows the desired frame format SF or ESF If the green top light is on this frame format is selected C If the green light is off press up twice on the SET NEXT switch to select this format d Press down on the SET NEXT switch to display the desired line code B8ZS or AMI If the green light is on line code is set to the displayed value e If the green light is off press up twice on the SET NEXT switch to change the line code to the displayed value oo 4 Disconnect the T1 input output connector RJ 48C from the MA 215 module adapter at the rear of the CM 5RB module or the DB 15 from the MA 216 adapter 5 Establish a local T1 loopback in one of two ways Harris Corporation 6 9 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Mux Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 6 Testing amp Troubleshooting Create an external loopback by connecting a Bantam Bantam patch cord from the T1 OUT EQUIP jack to the T1 IN EQUIP jack Create an internal equipment loopback by using the GROUP and SET NEXT switches to activate the EqLB function Section 6 3 1 6 Unseat all the channel modules in the multiplexer by pulling on their eject tabs but do not remove them completely from t
273. which each common and channel module draws current as needed Power supplies from the signaling battery and ring generator if used also connect to the power distribution bus Harris Corporation 2 1 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 2 Functional Description Version 2 11 August 2011 2 1 2 Drop and Insert Operation the Signal Bus Role The signal bus actually includes four buses TX A bus RX A bus TX B bus RX B bus In a terminal multiplexer the channel modules place their transmit signals on the TX A bus The CM 5RB common module takes these signals and multiplexes them together for transmission on the T1 line It also takes the incoming T1 signal demultiplexes it and places the resulting channel signals on the RX B bus from which the channel modules take their individual receive data Figure 2 2 lt TX A BUS x RX A BUS T1 Channel module Not used circuit THA RB A RX B BUS Physical TX B BUS slot 1 Not used Figure 2 2 Terminal Multiplexer Signal Bus Each channel module has a bus selection switch that sets its transmit and receive directions This switch is generally labeled TX A BUS or TERM Setting the TX A BUS or TERM switch on ensures that the module transmits on the TX A bus and receives from the RX B bus as required in a terminal multiplexer In a drop and insert multiplexer setting the TX A BUS or TERM switch on sets a chann
274. while its line loopback is active a CM 5RB module is essentially loop timed Once the line loopback is deactivated the module returns to its primary timing mode which you set PaLB Payload The payload portion of the received T1 signal is looped inserted into the payload portion loopback of the transmitted signal However the CM 5RB module itself generates the line code and overhead bits frame format of the transmitted signal Thus line code violations frame bit errors and CRC 6 errors the CM 5RB module received are not passed through While the payload loopback is active the CM 5RB module is automatically forced into the loop timed mode However once the payload loopback is deactivated the module returns to its primary timing mode which you set EqLB Equipment The payload portion of the transmitted T1 signal is looped into the payload portion of the loopback received T1 signal Thus you can use the equipment loopback to perform a local loopback test on all of the payload circuits terminated by a CM 5RB module While its equipment loopback is active a module transmits an unframed all ones signal also known as the alarm indication signal AI S Once the equipment loopback is deactivated the module returns to its primary timing mode which you set 6 3 1 2 Loopback State Review and Change To review or change the loopback state on a CM 5RB module perform these steps 1 Press up or down on the GROUP switch to display the LPBK gr
275. witch action generates a shelf alert and service continues on the backup module or line Table 2 7 Alert Alarm Line Condition Dependencies Alarm Alert I ndication Line Condition Condition Affects Active Line Condition Affects Standby Loss of frame OOF or LOF Alarm Alert Loss of signal LOS Alarm Alert Alarm indication signal Alarm Alert BER exceeds threshold Alarm Alert Unavailable signal state UAS Alarm Alert Remote Alarm Indication RAIS or Yellow Alert Alert Loopback Alert Alert This condition applies only if selected as a switching criterion Otherwise it does not result in an alert or alarm This condition applies only in AEC mode or if selected as a switching criterion in non AEC modes Otherwise it does not result in an alert or alarm No alarm or alert conditions are generated due to the condition of the backup T1 line if line redundancy mode is set to NOBK no backup This setting is typically used for systems installed without a backup T1 line The FTI mode is an additional Event condition mode When operating in FTI mode three additional Event conditions are in effect for line redundancy 2 16 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 2 Functional Description ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 e The 2 15 Event is declared if 2 or more errored seconds are detected in the most recent 15 minutes of operation and is cleared if
276. witch settings for line redundancy behave normally in that they can be set and read However these commands have no operational effect on the CM 5RB module Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 29 ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 5 Remote Control Version 2 11 August 2011 Remote Control of Redundant CM 5RB Modules The backup CM 5RB shelf address must be the same as the primary CM 5RB address You cannot talk to an inactive CM 5RB module over the remote port but the primary module does respond normally to ISiCL commands When a backup module takes over the function of the primary module an ALERT condition is generated A STATUS query from a remote interface receives this response OK gt gt gt ALERT AT SHELF lt SWITCHED TO REDUNDANT COMMON MODULE When the backup module is activated it can be remotely controlled When the backup is ready to return control to the primary module all configuration information for the channel modules is transmitted from the backup to the primary module before switching 5 2 3 3 ISICL WHO Command Changes have been made to the WHO command for combined module and line redundancy to augment information about any CM 5RB module in the shelf For this parameter the multiplexer responds to a WHO command by formulating a message with these elements e Network shelf address The CM 5RB module s identity co
277. with a 1 e Incorporating a data scrambler that applies its own form of zero substitution to the data for that channel B8ZS is a newer and more robust form of bipolar line coding that eliminates the problem of insufficient ones density With B8ZS any time a string of eight consecutive zeroes appears in the payload Figures 2 19 and 2 20 it is replaced by a zero substitution code a special sequence of ones and zeroes before transmission At the receive end this sequence is converted back to eight zeroes to maintain data integrity Intentional bipolar violations are applied to signal the presence of a zero substitution code whenever a bipolar violation is detected on a B8ZS circuit the multiplexer checks the surrounding bit sequence to determine whether it is part of a zero substitution code or a true transmission error 1 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Figure 2 19 Original Payload with Eight Consecutive Zeroes Harris Corporation 2 25 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 2 Functional Description Version 2 11 August 2011 Intentional Bipolar Violations Figure 2 20 B8ZS Zero Substitution Line Coding B8ZS is the preferred form of line coding and should be used instead of AMI whenever possible However some older networks do not support it 2 2 2 Terminal Multiplexers For terminal multiplexers a 3RU shelf can accommodate one or two plug in power supplies AC or DC A
278. x ACS 160 Series multiplexers provide an interface between T1 circuits and one or more payload channels which originate and terminate at plug in channel modules Channel modules convert voice program audio and data signals into a single or multiple 64 kbps digital signals These 64 kbps signals are then combined by time division multiplexing into a 1 544 Mbps T1 signal The T1 circuit is inherently duplex that is there are twenty four time slots in each direction of the circuit Figure 2 15 Thus while a two way voice or data channel may occupy Time Slot 6 in both directions a one way audio signal using Time Slots 7 and 8 in one direction would allow those two time slots to still be available to carry a different one way signal in the other direction di Overhead i 64 Y 64 Y 64 u 64 Y 64 TD 8 kbps ry ID kbps co DO kbps cp DO kbps Co DOM kbps x M kbps CO 1 2 3 23 24 64 y 64 RIRN 64 64 y 64 Y y DO kbps Co ID Kbps SOO Kbps yy DO kbps cp SOO kbps CD D 8 kbps cp 24 23 3 2 1 Figure 2 15 Train Representation of T1 Circuit Duplex Nature 2 2 1 1 T1 Frame Formats The T1 signal contains 8 000 frames per second Each frame consists of one 8 bit byte from each of the 24 time slots plus one overhead bit used to provide frame synchronization error detection and other functions Frames are arranged into larger groupings in one of these two formats e Superframe SF which groups 12 frames togethe
279. x Eae Len Rega 3 20 3 7 1 Shelf Power for Additional Channel Modules ccceeee eee ee eee ee eee ee ea ees 3 21 3 7 2 Channel Module Direction and Transmit Receive Time Slot Setting 3 21 3 7 3 Channel Module Installation Procedure sssssss 3 21 Section 4 Setup amp Configuration eene Go 1 4 1 Customer Service Unit CSU USe score tp Er Era rers er Rr d sie 4 1 4 2 CM 5RB Basic Configuration Group Menu ssssssm 4 1 4 2 1 Access Configuration Group cece cee eect e eee memes mese eene 4 6 4 2 2 Display and Change Items in Basic Configuration Group sssesssse 4 6 4 3 CM 5RB Advanced Configuration Group Menu sssseeeee 4 6 4 3 1 Enter Advanced Configuration Group ssssssssnmm mmm 4 7 4 3 2 Display and Change Items in Advanced Configuration Group 4 7 4 4 T1 Transmitter Timing TI ME Group ssHHHH 4 11 4 4 1 Primary versus Fallback Timing csssesssemHIHHHHH nena eee 4 12 4 4 2 Timing Status Indicator Lights e cece eee eee eee mmm meme 4 12 4 4 3 Timing Status FUNCtIONS cece cece eee een mene enne nnn 4 13 4 4 4 Timing Mode Use cssssssssssssseesI e ene esent esee 4 13 4 4 5 Synchronized T1 Systems cece ete eme mese esee enne nnns 4 15 4 4 6 Frame Synchronized T1 Systems ssssssssssssesss mmn 4 16 4 5 T
280. x data circuits have both an input and an output at each terminal multiplexer However some payload types like simplex data and one way program audio channels have an input at one multiplexer and an output at the other with no return signal Harris Corporation 2 27 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 2 Functional Description Version 2 11 August 2011 The T1 circuit itself is always full duplex Section 2 2 1 T1 Digital Transmission With Intraplex multiplexers any time slots used by a one way channel are still available to carry an independent one way channel in the other direction For example if program audio is being transmitted on time slots 1 to 4 from Location 1 to Location 2 you can transmit another audio program simultaneously on time slots 1 to 4 from Location 2 to Location 1 2 2 4 Drop and Insert Multiplexers ACS 165 and ACS 168 An ACS 165 drop and insert multiplexer is essentially a pair of back to back ACS 163 terminal multiplexers in which some circuits terminate while others pass through Figure 2 24 A drop and insert multiplexer can terminate payload circuits from either of two different T1 circuits that is from either of two different locations ACS 165 Drop Insert Multiplexer 1 544 Mbps c s 1 544 Mbps T1 DI A circuit Through circuits T1 DI B circuit in physical slot 1 mS in physical slot 2 CM CM 5RB 5RB Twenty four Twenty four 64 kbps
281. xtricable element of the microprocessor and is not independently replaceable The lithium battery powers the memory on the chip and thus retains setup information whenever operating power is removed which might occur at any of these times e When equipment is stored or in transit e When the module containing the chip is removed from a powered shelf e When there is a temporary loss of power other than unintentional or catastrophic In the design of Intraplex equipment battery failure does not affect proper operation while the equipment is under operating power Battery failure does not become evident until power is removed and the equipment is subsequently repowered Upon repowering the alphanumeric display on the common module flashes ERR 0 or remains blank Harris Corporation 2 5 Intraplex Products ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 2 Functional Description Version 2 11 August 2011 The lithium battery on the microprocessor chip has a data retention time of at least 10 years and an expected shelf life of at least 20 years In this context data retention time is the time when power is removed the battery is active and shelf life is the time when the shelf is powered the battery is inactive Intraplex maintenance offers equipment repair by replacing inoperative plug in modules A failed lithium battery causes the common module on which the battery is mounted to fail Although as
282. y subset of those functions resides in the managed system SNMP enables communication between managers and agents to determine and report the status of network elements The SNMP architecture includes these key components e SNMP protocol e SNMP manager e SNMP agent such as the SCM IP module e Management Information Base MIB The SNMP capability of the SCM IP module also allows ACS 160 Series and STL 160 Series multiplexers to be integrated into a multi node multi vendor network controlled by an automated Network Management System NMS 5 2 3 I ntraplex Simple Command Language ISiCL You can use ISiCL pronounced icicle to configure and operate your ACS 160 Series STL 160 Series multiplexer using either of two different physical connections either by direct connection from a computer or via DSO communications Section 5 1 Physical Connections These multiplexers operate strictly in the command response mode That is a multiplexer generates a message only in response to a received command You can use ISiCL to communicate with the multiplexer by typing ISiCL commands at the keyboard and viewing the responses on the terminal screen 5 18 Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 5 Remote Control ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation Version 2 11 August 2011 5 2 3 1 ISiCL Command Line Format The general ISiCL command format consists of these four fields each separated by a colon a
283. yload Loopback Frame Overhead Multiplexer Loop or Through Front Panel User Interface External LOOP Timing Input EXT RS 422 Ree te processor aadi RS 232 INE I germ 1 544 MHz CM S5RB status and control bus ULM RS 422 Figure 2 4 CM 5RB Common Module T1 Functional Diagram Harris Corporation Intraplex Products 2 3 ACS 160 Series amp STL 160 Series T1 Multiplexer Installation amp Operation 2 Functional Description Version 2 11 August 2011 2 1 3 1 Channel Multiplexing to Form T1 Aggregate The CM 5RB common module develops midplane bus synchronization signals The transmit section of each channel module synchronizes to these signals and places its data onto the selected bus The CM 5RB module then forms the aggregate signal using either the ESF extended superframe or SF D4 superframe framing format ESF is the preferred format and you should use it in all cases except when the network or CSU cannot support it Section 2 2 1 1 T1 Frame Formats gives more details on these two formats The CM 5RB module uses tri state bus drivers and receivers to permit routing the multiplexer and demultiplexer bus signals to either midplane bus Bus A or Bus B This versatile bus capability enables simple multiplexer configuration for terminal or drop and insert use Section 2 1 2 Drop and Insert Operation the Signal Bus Role 2 1 3 2 T1 Line Driver Line coding can be se

ACS - Simulcast Solutions

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents